Home

CPro-2000 User Manual - Alcatel

1. SET LINK SET NE Set Network Element NE SET OC3 Set OC 3 Provision OC 3 SET PASSWD SET PMTHRES LINE Set Performance Monitoring Threshold Line SET PMTHRES SECT Set Performance Monitoring Threshold Section SET PMTHRES STS1 Set Performance Monitoring Threshold P STS 1 SET PMTHRES T1 Set Performance Monitoring Threshold T1 SET PMTHRES T3 Set Performance Monitoring Threshold T3 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commandse 307 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item SET PMTHRES VT1 Set Performance Monitoring Threshold ae VT1 5 SET STATE EC SetState ECI o SET STATE STSI Set State STS 1 o SET STATE T1 Set StateTL S SET STATE T3 SetStateT3 o SET STS1 SET SYNC Set Synchronization SET VTI O SeVTILS o SWITCH FN_ Protection Switch Function Unit SWITCH LINE Protection Switch Line SWITCH LS Protection Switch Low Speed o SWITCH PATH STS1 Switch Path STS o SWITCH PATH VTI Switch Path VT1 5 SWITCH SYNC_ Protection Switch Synchronization TEST ALM_ si Test Office Alarm TEST AUTO Test Auto Turnup _ _ o o o TEST LED_ Test LED Indicators TEST SYSCTL Test System Controllers TEST TLM PAR Test Telemetry Parallel TEST TLM SER_ Test Telemetry Serial TEST TRMSN T1 Test Transmission TI TEST TRMSN T3 Test Transmission T3 La TOGGLE Ctl T Toggle So UPD Update DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures Purpose
2. 5 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example le SNC OC3 J DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 NOTE A single 0x1 cross connection is displayed as a dashed line to differentiate it from the solid line of a 1 1 two way cross connection Enter Dual 0x1 STS 1 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter Dual 0x1 VT1 5 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 or Enter Dual 0x1 STS 3 Cross Connection FiberReach equipped with 22 type circuit pack Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 129 NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a dual 0x1 cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be a low speed slot For DDM 2000 OC 3 The low speed slot must contain two 27 type OLIU or two BBG19 circuit packs in both service and protection slots The service and protection lines must be set to in service JS For DDM 2000 OC 12 The low speed slot must contain two 21 type OLIU circuit packs The OC 3 line application parameter for the function unit used in the cross connection must be set to 0x for TL1 and MML For FiberReach Must be equipped with 28G U OLIU circuit pack in the mains an
3. cccccccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 Provisioning OC 1 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 185 Provisioning Set Lan DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 0 ccccccccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 Provisioning Set Security DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 and FiberReach Release 4 0 1188 Provisioning T1 Ports FiberReach cc cccccccceeceeeeeeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 191 The Update Menu 193 OVEN ss cats ctekiS carpe E ces ts cognate EEEE EE 193 WEN INTE VIEW ccc aetna eeen ri E E EE e eniai e 193 Dee OM CIN TE NV Wy a E A ai 194 Alarm NE View Only ecsrisnoiciraanen a a aa aa aak a aaia 194 AE E o E E E E 194 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Map Subnetwork View ccccccccesesssessssssseseseeseesesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1953 Inventory Subnetwork View nonennnnnnonnnssonsnssnnssssnennssennnesnessssreerersersrsrrereesserreeenerreereererns 195 The Window Menu 197 ODF crip ata olears nesters batrate sp se E ce sopaindetetears nated duteraicn N 197 D Ta E A E E E EE AE E E A A E E E A EE 198 TieHor ZO TVA e E N 199 TEN a a a A E E E 200 PME ATI SSG NMS E atc E E E T N E E E E O E 201 Window Topple sieisen i i 202 The End to End Path Menu 203 OVENI W E E E ere rece 203 Two Endpoint End to End Path Across a Single Ring cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeseessssessesssssssseeeens 204 Ring Transport SEE V ICG so ccs
4. 7 You are prompted to choose another drop node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 237 Enter End To End Path x gt Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 8 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 9 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path X Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed 10 The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 238 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Video Service End to End Paths CPro 2000 offers the feature of Video Service Paths in DDM 2000 OC 12 NEs Video paths are created using STS 3C cross connections NOTE You must purchase the DDM 2000 OC 12 STS 3C feature package to have this capability See your Lucent Technologies account representative for details The STS 3C feature allows concatenation of three STS 1 signals into a single STS 3C signal and cross connection at the STS 3C rate Two cross connection types support Video Service paths Video Source and Video Sink Video paths look like one way paths because they only us
5. Cross Connections The Partition Inventory also determines what cross connections exist within the NEs at STS 1 STS 3 and VT1 5 levels including DS1 DS3 EC 1 OC 1 and OC 3 termination points These cross connections display graphically Alarms tThe Partition Inventory also retrieves the current alarm status of all the nodes in the partition on the GUI window CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 25 How to Get a Partition Inventory To inventory an partition do one of the following e Check Partition Inventory in the Login dialog box The Partition Inventory is taken during the login Note that only the partition you logged into is inventoried For more information see the Accessing the Subnetwork section later in this chapter OR e Select Partition Inventory from the Node Manager window if you did not select Partition Inventory at login or to inventory other partitions in the subnetwork See the Node Manager section in The Access Menu chapter for more information When you choose Partition Inventory CPro 2000 automatically discovers a partition A discovered partition is when CPro 2000 recognizes it as part of the subnetwork and knows its configuration For MML the first partition that CPro 2000 discovers contains the local node to which you are logged in For TL1 any node can be selected by entering its TID in the Login dialog box As each partition is discovered it is numbered by CPro 2000 for
6. Jal a ls 1a 3 0 ls 1b 1 _ Is 1b 2 Is 1b 3 Ils 7a 2 Is 2b 1 ls 2b 2 Is 2b 3 Is 3a 1 2 OOOO Ea 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 235 Choose the Tributary stsI le 1 2 a stsI le 1 3 stsI le 2 1 stsI le 2 3 stsI le 3 1 stsI le 3 2 _ stsI le 3 3 stsI le 4 1 stsI le 4 2 stsI le 4 3 stsI le 6 1 stsI le 6 2 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path 5T53 i Add Node F6 4 Selected Low Speed Is 2a 3 Tributary sts1 1e 6 3 5 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the drop node Double click the desired node The following screen appears 236 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this drop node Click OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End To End Path STS3 Add Node Fb 4 Selected Low Speed Is 2a 3 Tributary sts1 1e 6 3 Drop Node F6 1 Selected Low Speed Is 3a 3
7. The FT 2000 Provision Menu Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 3 Lines The OC 3 Line Provision dialog box appears 174 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 OC 3 Line Provisioning Enter O 3 Option Parameters Line Aid AU4 Mapping Alam Seventy Signal Degrade Threshold io C3 Protection from OCF OC3 Protection from OC4G The EQPDEPRPT parameter value displayed in the OC 3 Line Provisioning dialog box corresponds to the value selected in the FT 2000 OC 48 NE Options dialog box Refer to Provisioning Set NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach for more information 2 Choose a low speed slot by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the LINE AID field A list of all the OC 3 Line AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one Get Value is enabled 3 Click the Syne Message down arrow for a listing of all available sync message parameters enabled K2 used NOTE About S1 and K2 although these two parameters are available for provisioning OC 3 Lines from an FT 2000 OC 48 make sure that you are consistent with your selection throughout the entire network For example if you select S1 S1 must be used throughout that network 4 Click Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned Note that choosing the default Line AID Is all disables the Get Value button as it applies to more than one set
8. There are two ways of accessing report options while in a Subnetwork View You can use the Report menu on the menu bar which is the method described in the following procedures The other method is to select a closed or unexpanded partition with a single left mouse button click and click the right mouse button to display a pop up menu containing a Reports submenu From a Subnetwork View the following report options are available e Path e Cross Connections e Timeslot Usage e Bandwidth Usage NOTE Reports generated while in the Subnetwork View contain data for the current or selected partition only To gather data for the entire subnetwork a report must be created for each partition in the subnetwork From a Network Element View the following report options are available e Cross Connections e Map e Alarms e History e Equipment e Protection State FT 2000 only e Port Slot Options CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu e 109 Report Screen Functions All CPro 2000 reports are displayed in a window similar to the following Sy Path Report x CPro 2000 Path FKeport E October 05 1998 11 45 For Partition P 2 Tlus partition contams 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 network elementis Path Name m 2 2 3 VTLS aS ae ae SHC OCS H WAY SHC OC3 E IMAT Path Name b 1 4 1 hairpin SNC OC3 M aS aS SHC OC3 hif ay AY b 2 3 3 w 4 All report windows contain the following useful functions e U
9. 248 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter End To End Path fa continue gt Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to 9 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 10 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path Ed G Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed 11 The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path Access cE View aa Provision a Window Conns Alarms Help Enter a VT1 5 T1 Locked End to End Path FiberReach Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for VT1 5 T1 signal rate and Locked Arc path type CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 249 2 Near the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose a locked add drop node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 3 Select the low speed slot for this locked add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following scre
10. IF condition The IF statement allows statements under IF to be included between and On condition false it goes to an ELSE statement or to the next statement Condition can be one of the following WAITFOR FAIL DIALNUMBER FAIL or CONNECT FAIL Examples IF WAITFOR FAIL user msg Token not received transmitt r if connect fail error msg Unable to connect the COM port exiting exit ELSE This is a C like ELSE statement that allows statements under ELSE to be included between and On condition false the execution goes to the ELSE statement Examples IF WAITFOR FAIL user msg Token not received transmitt r WAITFOR DESTINATION 0 ELSE user msg Logging into the system transmit Tyr pause 500 if connect fail error msg Unable to connect the COM port exiting exit else user msg Connected to the COM port USER MSG string Puts message box on screen containing the string where string is any string of text enclosed between double quotations CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Filese 321 Example USER MSG Command completed successfully ERROR MSG string Puts error message box on screen containing the string where string is any string of text enclosed between double quotations Example ERROR MSG Cannot log into the system EXIT Terminates script execution with error END T
11. Signal Degrade Threshold AIS Alarm The DCC Mode parameter allows you to set the DCC to either distinct or identical NOTE To provision an OC 12 Line from OC 3 or FiberReach shelves the main slots must be equipped with 24G or 29G circuit packs The following Line Provisioning dialog box displays for FT 2000 OC 48 162 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 OC 12 Line Provisioning Enter O 12 Option Parameters Line Aid 4U4 Mapping Alam Seventy The EQPDEPRPT parameter value displayed in the EC1 Port Provisioning dialog box corresponds to the value selected FT 2000 OC 48 NE Options dialog box Refer to Provisioning Set NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach for more information 2 Choose a line address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the line address box A list of all the OC 12 line addresses for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a line address is selected you can click Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned If you choose a line address that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update the values use the down arrow list at each text box and select the appropriate values for each parameter 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the prov
12. SpecCond 530 Cross connection restoration shall be checked for the followings 1 connection type 2 all the end points of the connection type 3 low speed end points 4 protection mode 5 if the conflicting cross connection in existance is part of a path Note that when a cross connection to be restored consists of low speed end point s and not all the end points match with existing cross connections it is in conflict with two cross connections SpecCond 540 For DDM network elements Channel States shall be set only cross connected and conform to the following cases 1 WVTI1 5 channels to DS 1 OC 3 or EC 1 interfaces 2 STS1 channels to DS3 D amp C 0x1 ADR or DS1 3 STS3C channels from main to OC 3C interface units SpecCond 550 OC 1 line states are applicable only to OC 1 lines terminating on 27 type or 26G2 U OLIUs in OC 3 systems SpecCond 560 EC 1 port states are only applicable to OC 3 or OC 12 equiped with STS1E circuit packs set to LOW SPEED with hardware switch The STS1Es must be cross connected to main with no VT cross connections SpecCond 570 If the user specified that the target NE is to be treated as RT and the backup is from a CO NE then default values shall be used for the SET ATTR ENV and SET ATTR CONT commands If the user specified that the target NE is to be treated as CO and the backup is from a RT NE then the SET ATTR ENV and SET ATTR CONT commands are not needed SpecCond 580 Optic
13. The macro definition appears at the end of the script file as shown in the following sample ALARM _DELAY Enter the alarm holdoff delay in seconds 0 32 2 This macro example causes a dialog box to display if you are in Expert mode with the message prompt Enter the alarm holdoff delay in seconds and an input range of values of 0 30 A text input field for typing in the value also appears in the dialog box Press Return to accept the value Using Functions and Macros Together Macros can be used to allow the user to supply values to a function during its execution In the following example when the function is called the user is asked for the value of the DSNE parameter the value of the AGNE parameter and to enter three additional parameters and values If the user does not have three additional parameters to enter they can send carriage returns for each prompt 826iaAppenpixi Scdipi amt Bathhb Fiteso definition statement supplies the CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 The function definition FUNCTION MY_SET_NE 5 transmitt set ne dsne 1 agne 2 3 4 5 CALL WAITING lt Execute gt lt The set ne command had problems gt transmitt ye CALL WAITING lt lt gt lt The set ne command failed gt The function call CALL MY SET _NE lt S DSNE_Vlaue gt lt AGNE_Value gt lt S ANY_PARA gt lt ANY PARA gt lt S ANY PARA gt The macro calls DSNE_Value Enter DSNE Value Yes No
14. V Alarms Preferences Alarm Tab Delete D Alarms Preferences Call List Tab Name N Alarms Preferences Call List Tab Phone PIN P Alarms Preferences Call List Tab Address Type T Alarms Preferences Call List Tab Add A Alarms Preferences Call List Tab Edit E Alarms Pager Ctrl P Task Sets the audible alarm state Check mark is displayed if feature is on Turns the pager feature on or off Checkmark is displayed if feature is on Brings up a dialog box from which to define call list criteria set audible alarm auto alarm polling and modem parameters and test pager setup Controls the frequency or repeat rate of the alarm sound Controls the frequency with which alarm status 1s updated Specifies communication port that corresponds to the available modem Displays the prefix required to dial an outside pager number Displays existing log file Deletes the log file Displays the name associated with a specific pager number and alarm level Displays the pager number that corresponds to the name specified in the Name field Specifies the pager type Adds a new entry to the data file Modifies the entries in the Call List window CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Alarms Preferences Call List Tab Delete D Alarms Preferences Call List Tab OK O Alarms Preferences Call List Tab Cancel C Alarms Preferences Pa
15. e Enter the Phone Number to be dialed and select the appropriate Modem Type from the down arrow list 7 Click OK to exit the Communications Options dialog box Selecting Communications Options from the AUI Procedure 1 Start CPro 2000 and click anywhere in the AUI window to highlight it give it the focus 2 From the AUI Communications menu access modify the communications settings described in the previous section Selecting Communications Options from the GUI NOTE There are two options in the AUI Communications gt Settings menu Modify and From File If you choose the Modify option the default communications settings will appear and you can view or configure the settings for your environment These settings can then be saved to a file using the Save command in the AUI File menu If you choose the From File option a list of all previously saved settings files is displayed Note however that only files saved to the CPro 2000 R11 0 folder are displayed Select the desired file Connecting to an NE via Serial Link 30 e CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 offers three ways to connect to an NE using a serial link i Connecting to an NE Manually This procedure details how to access the subnetwork using the AUI without a data communications script Similar to accessing CPro 2000 via a data communications script this access method is also used when the PC running CPro 2000 is directly connected to the CIT port of the NE or th
16. 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the first add drop node Double click on the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 231 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears Choose the Tributary EENE a sts1 1e 6 1 sts1 le 6 2 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Add Drop Node 1 Fb 4 Selected Low Speed Is 5a 3 Tributary sts1 1e 4 3 5 You are prompted to choose a second add drop node Double click the desired node The following screen appears 232 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click OK The main end to end path form displays Enter End To End Path S5T53 ii Add Drop Node 1 F6 4 Selected Low Speed Is 5a 3 Tributary sts1 1le 4 3 Add Drop Node 2 F6 1 Selected Low Speed ls 4a 3 7 Ifthe information you have
17. DEFAULT SCR file 12 328 Delete a range of VT1 5 cross connections 159 Delete end to end path 283 Discovered partition 26 80 DS3 port options 166 E ECI port options 167 69 Edit Menu 26 52 57 71 91 98 303 333 End to End Path Menu 25 52 203 4 211 214 219 231 234 240 245 249 253 54 259 263 270 277 283 85 303 Error message 71 94 100 105 123 322 377 Exit 11 15 19 30 52 56 57 62 69 74 77 89 299 321 22 324 25 328 32 F FiberReach 5 7 23 28 34 36 45 47 48 53 95 98 104 114 123 26 129 32 159 161 64 166 70 Index e 389 172 185 188 89 191 203 5 207 211 24445 249 259 288 33443 377 381 FT 2000 OC 48 7 24 30 46 47 51 52 63 65 91 100 101 124 133 137 139 145 147 149 50 152 154 156 161 69 172 174 79 203 6 222 226 231 234 284 288 315 318 330 G General 5 6 22 37 329 General conventions 2 Graphical User Interface GUI 1 5 40 385 H Hairpin cross connections 111 127 Hardware platform 6 Help Menu 52 57 303 4 Hide X Conn 63 103 105 INI File Editor 7 18 288 89 293 Interface Settings Tab 18 19 22 Invalid port response 71 K Keyboard conventions 3 L Locked Arc end to end paths 244 Login 16 17 23 26 28 31 36 41 58 62 69 71 73 77 83 87 94 171 190 306 7 312 14 315 318 325 327 329 332 339 351 Login script 32 82 Login Rlogin Logout 5 6 22 37 329 Logout 41
18. Fo 4 Selected Low Speed Is 3b Tributary sts3 1e 6 5 You are prompted to choose a second add drop node Double click the desired node The following screen appears 224 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Is fa 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click OK The main end to end path form displays Add Drop Node 1 Fb 4 Selected Low Speed Is 3b Tributary sts3 1le 6 Add Drop Node 2 F6 1 Selected Low Speed Is 3b 7 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path x Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 225 8 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 9 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path x wD Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed 10 The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path Enter an STS 3 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Subnetwork View select the End to End Path pull down menu or click the right mouse button and select End to End from the pop up menu and then sele
19. No AGNE_Value Enter AGNE Value Yes No No ANY_PARA Enter the parameter and its value like this TID newtid CAPTURE Command Script Files The CAPTURE command provides the ability to capture terminal output to a file The syntax of the CAPTURE command is shown below CAPTURE filename where filename is any valid file path name If the file name is OFF then the current capturing if ON is stopped An example is shown below CAPTURE myrep log NOTE If the specified file name already exists the user is asked whether the file should be overwritten CPro 2000 script files may contain data communications parameters such as PC settings dial up commands and information for connecting to the local node The script file should not include any commands that actually log the user into CPro 2000 The script file should only get the user to the point where the CPro 2000 GUI starts the login process A simple data communications script is provided with CPro 2000 called DEFAULT SCR For aExample Data Communications Script File see the sample at the end of this appendix CPro 2000 uses this script unless a different script file name is specified CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Filese 327 ase 11 0 The DEFAULT SCR file contains the following lines settings coml 9600 e 7 1 none connect if connect fail user msg Could not connect to COM1 exit end This simp
20. The purpose of this section is to provide a cross reference between the Task Oriented Procedures TOPs section of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported in CPro 2000 The following table provides a cross reference between the CPro 2000 capabilities and the DDM 2000 OC 3 TOPs Not every step in every one of the identified TOPs may be supported in CPro 2000 The following table only means that significant steps of the TOPs identified in the following table will be helped by the use of CPro 2000 Wherever the TOP calls for use of a particular craft interface terminal CIT command that is not supported in the CPro 2000 menu it is assumed that the user will enter such commands directly from the AUI window 308 e Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Supported by CPro 2000 NTP 002 But Not In Service But Not In Service NTP 007 NTP 008 Add New MXRVO Group for DS1 Service System In Service NTP 009 NTP 010 NTP O11 NTP 012 NTP 026 Add New DDM 2000 OC 3 Node Shelf To DDM 2000 OC 3 Path Switched Ring NTP 027 Discontinue DDM 2000 OC 3 Node Shelf From DDM 2000 OC 3 Path Switched Ring Network But Not In Service System In Service NTP 036 Discontinue EC 1 Interface NTP 006 Add New DS1 Service Group Already In Service NTP 038 Convert DS1 Group Service to EC 1 Group Service DLP 531 Retrieve
21. redline X conn ent crs sts3 rtrv crs sts3 cct loca nid locz extra Alarm loca locz nid 372 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 oc3st pst Sst audit redline oo l e ae ese Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Prov Prov Prov Prov Prov Prov Prov Prov Prov CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Prov Backup Cmd ent prot sts rtrv prot sts1 ent prot line rtrv prot line ent prot ls rtrv prot ls rtrv state rtrv pthtrc sts 1 rtrv pthtrc sts 1 Parameter au4map ntfencde syncmsg oc3frmlgx oc3tolgx sdthr sst au4map ntfcncde syncmsg oc12frmlgx oc12tolgx oc12tdir sdthr sst sdthr syncmsg fbyteproc Sw_ State actswprty status label inctrc tre Special Conditions no STS3 NE in ring a ring use rtrv state only to restore nppa removed by cpro970966 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 373 9o j t least one STS3 NE in x E B O a m B o a m B hie eee ad mk Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd cae Prov ent t3 rtrv t3 2 ls Prov TT feentds rte pty S e Po speccond 640 Perf trv th all 374 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters Parameter level optlinecde wavlnth pyldfrmlgx pyldtolgx opoc3frmlgx opoc3tol
22. sesp nend uasp nend oof fend cvp fend esp fend sesp fend uasp fend KK KM KK KKK KM KM RK Perf set th ec 1 rtrv th ec 1 See SpecCond 630 cvl nend all can be used to esl nend retrieve all these ses nend parameters s oof nend cvp nend esp nend sesp nend uasp nend oof fend cvp fend esp fend sesp fend uasp fend CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 363 KOKO OKOA Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC12 with MML Backup Cmd Special Conditions _ 7 0 Switch treme product id po ttrv ne ott selector k System set secu rtrv secu Comm set fecom rtrv fecom Comm ent tll msgmap rtrv tll msgmap Comm ent osacmap rirv osacmap 364 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters security timeout communication Local restore only dcc ns us acid tll maintenance tll memoryadministration tll test tll peercom tll other tll other2 Pe ed tid co rt idle channel sig shelf vc type snpa address acid a X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 RL o Comm ent ulsdcc 13 rtrv ulsdcc 13 l3org I3res 3rd I3area I3Iv2is ent ulsdec 14 pote ep KK KK KM KK KK KM ii aaa C
23. type of cross connection protocol and data communications channel DCC Provision Set Feat Displays or modifies performance monitoring parameters for DDM 2000 NEs Provision Set CID Secu Displays or modifies the current settings for DCE DTE Set CID DCE and Set CID DTE parameters for FT 2000 OC 48 NEs 64 e Task Mapping CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Menu Item Task Keyboard shortcut Provision Update NE Updates the system database on the NE to reflect the existing hardware configuration and incoming signals Provision OSI Stack Retrieves current or sets new values for the OSI Layer 3 Layer 4 Stack Update Inventory Network Retrieves the equipage and cross connections of Element View the current NE and updates the Network Element Ctrl 1 View database Update X Conn Retrieves the cross connections of the current NE Ctrl S and updates the Network Element View database Update Alarm Updates and displays the alarm status on the GUI status bar for the current NE Update Active Users Retrieves and displays information about users who are logged into an NE via MML Update Map Retrieves the partition topology from all nodes in the current partition Subnetwork View only Update Inventory Subnetwork Retrieves the partition topology equipage and View cross connections from the current partition Subnetwork View only Window Cascade Arranges Network Element Views and Shift F4 Subnetwork Vie
24. CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 159 160 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu Overview Use the Provision Menu to display port provisioning options for a given NE and to modify these options as needed All of the port provisioning functions are provided as menu items and may vary with NE The table below lists all the provisioning options that are available with each network element Network Elements Provisioning T 2000 OC 48 Options OC 3 OC 12 DS1 T1 Ports DS3 Lines EC 1 Ports LS Ports NCT 2 Lines OC 1 Lines OC 3 Lines OC 12 Lines OC 48 Lines Set Date Set OC 3 Set OC 12 Set NE Set Security Set Lan Set OC 48 Set Feat Set NPPA Set CID Secu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 161 Note You cannot specify parameter values by typing directly in the value field To select parameter values click the down arrow to the right of the parameter for available options then select a value from the list of options In situations where Line States can be set CPro 2000 sets the state to AUTO if the user selects the Z S parameter Provisioning OC 12 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 12 Lines The following Line Provisioning dialog box appears for DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 3 OC 12 Line Provisioning Enter O 12 Option Parameters Line Address
25. Fb 4 Selected Low Speed Is 3b Tributary sts3 1e 5 Drop Node F6 1 Selected Low Speed Is 4b 7 You are prompted to choose another drop node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 229 Enter End To End Path ix x Caution Execution of this command map affect service Do you want to continue 8 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 9 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path x Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed 10 The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 230 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter an STS 1 Two way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS1 signal rate and 2WAY path type Enter End To End Path STS3 i NOTE When the Audit On box is checked the alarm feature that notifies the user of any signal problem is activated To turn off this feature click the box to remove the check mark
26. KOKOKOKOKO KM KK KK KM KM KK KK KK KK KR Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Switch wss o productia S o Switch ttrv ow orderwire mode Need BBG10 O K X X W 13 5 Nn d Tr dO ee System ent sys rtrv sys new tid rnestat almgrp agne shelf cort idle x25ps 344 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 13 0 13 5 15 0 System ent cid secu rtrv cid secu state tmout porttype echo baudrate System rtrv user secu uid uap c ps p lt ps a p lt i a aa a EEE EE E msgtype Comm ent osacmap rtrv osacmap V snpa acid ie Comm ent ulsdcc 13 rtrv ulsdcec 3 l3org l3res lI3rd l3area I3lv2is ent ulsdec 14 ee CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 345 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued 15 0 Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 13 0 Comm rtrv ulsdcc l4 l4tlif l4tltm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajnsap l4tdctid l4tdcnsap Comm ent ulsdcc l4 l4tlif 14tltm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajorg l4ajres l4ajrd l4ajarea ld de ee r rnnr KK KKM
27. The Setup dialog box appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Installation e 9 ase 11 0 10 e Installation CPro 2000 Setup ts preparing the InstallShield A Wizard which will guide you through the rest of the setup process Please walt 99 5 7 Read the text in the Setup dialog box and wait for the window to close The Welcome window appears Welcome Welcome to the CPro 2000 A11 0 Setup program This program will install CPro 2000 711 0 on your computer ltiz strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programe you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARRING This program is protected by copyright law and International treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or arny portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and Will be prosecuted to the masimum extent possible under law Cancel 8 Read the text in the Welcome dialog box then click Next The Software License Agreement dialog box appears Software License Agreement x Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement LIMITED USE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT NOTICE READ ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LIMITED USE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SGREEMENT PRIOR TO DOWNLOADING INSTALLING AND OR USING
28. complete the setup Setup Complete TIP For easier access to CPro 2000 we suggest that you create a shortcut for the GUI It is not necessary to create one for the AUI as it automatically displays whenever the GUI is opened Uninstalling CPro 2000 R11 0 Procedure 1 From the Start button click CPro 2000 R11 0 then select CPro 11 0 Uninstall from the submenu The Confirm File Deletion message box appears 14 e Installation CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 Confirm File Deletion 2 Click Yes to continue the uninstall or click No to cancel the uninstall The Remove Programs From Your Computer window that appears tracks the progress of the uninstall process Remove Programs From Your Computer 3 Click OK to complete the uninstall and exit the Remove Programs From Your Computer window NOTE Files created after installation such as Backup files may not be deleted during the uninstall process Manually delete these files and directory by using the Explorer window 4 Exit any dialog boxes NOTE If you intend to reinstall CPro 2000 restart your PC at this point to ensure successful reinstallation CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Installation e 15 ase 11 0 Customizing CPro 2000 Settings 16 e Installation CPRO INI File The CPRO INI file is created in the installation directory when CPro 2000 is installed This file contains selectable parameters for configuring the manner in which CPro 2000 w
29. e To drop an STS 3C signal on a DDM 2000 OC 3 or FiberReach shelf the Function Unit C fn c slot must be equipped with a 22 type OLIU e To drop an STS 3C signal on a DDM 2000 OC 3 shelf the timeslot must also be configured in 0x mode using the Set OC 3 command in the Provisioning Menu For details on allowable cross connections consult the User Manual for the relevant NE The Network Element View section of The User Interface chapter provides a detailed description of the NE view for DDM 2000 OC 3 R15 x and FiberReach R4 0 shelves with 29G OLIU circuit packs in the main slots IMA LAN Packs and T1 Repeater Packs IMA LAN packs have the Apparatus Code BBF9 or BBF10 They occupy two adjacent low speed slots on a DDM 2000 OC 3 R15 shelf and are made up of 8 DSIs CPro 2000 supports the same cross connections on an IMA LAN pack as on a DS1 pack namely end to end locked arc 2 way 3 node interworking and 4 node interworking VT cross connections 124 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 T1 Repeater packs have the Apparatus Code BBF6 For DDM 2000 OC 3 R15 0 and FiberReach R4 0 CPro 2000 supports the same cross connects on a T1 Repeater pack as on a DS1 pack namely end to end locked arc 2 way 3 node interworking and 4 node interworking VT cross connections Change LocA LocZ and Roll STS 3 and STS 1 Cross Connections CPro 2000 can change the source of a cross connection without affecting service by using the
30. which can accommodate a SubNetwork Map and several NE Views GUI See Graphical User Interface MML Human machine language defined by Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone CCITT NE See Network Element CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Glossary of Terms e 385 386 e Glossary of Terms Network Element A network element NE is a piece of equipment or service that is part of a data communications network Non Preemptible Protection Access A feature which allows the protection tributaries to serve as unprotected service tributaries while the corresponding service tributaries become unprotected NPPA See Non Preemptible Protection Access Object Linking and Embedding OLE This Windows feature is used to transfer and share information between Windows based applications and accessories For CPro 2000 the OLE Object Packager tool registers the application in a database and subsequently creates a CPro 2000 program group and associated icons OC 12 Optical Carrier 12 is a SONET signal capable of carrying 12 STS 1 signals or the equivalent OC 3 Optical Carrier 3 is a SONET signal capable of carrying three STS 1 signals or the equivalent OC 48 Optical Carrier 48 is a SONET signal capable of carrying 48 STS 1 signals or the equivalent OLE See Object Linking and Embedding Operations System An operations system OS is a system providing support for telephone com
31. 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajnsap l4tdctid l4tdcnsap Comm ent ulsdcc l4 l4tlif l4tItm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajorg l4ajres l4ajrd l4ajarea l4ajsys CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 359 lt E KK KR KR RK MM KK a KK KK OK OK OM Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd 7 Comm fF rtrv fecom communications side Local restore only 7 7 Switch rtrv synen set attr alm rtrv attr alm e set attr cont rtrv attr cont conttype Only RT Alam fentasne o o S i 360 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 l4etdc Not required to handle l4tdctid TDC l4tdcorg l4tdcres l4tdcrd l4tdcarea l4tdcsys l4tdcsel syncnmode syncfunction aisthres with BBS2B cct pac mdsw STC omd track provisioned mode ntfcnde Only RT almmsg almtype pbit ntfcncde ais sfthr pst Enter separately fmt pmmd linecde ican cee ae eee p CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 Port amp Line ent ec 1 rtrv ec 1 pbit ntfcncde ais sfthr pst Enter separately fmt pmmd Port amp Line ent oc3 rtrv oc3 kbyte syncmsg type sfthr concat Only for linear rel pst Enter separately int applicati
32. 8 Click the Close button to close the report The following screen appears Change TID Purpose To change the current network element s TID Procedure 1 From the Edit pull down menu select Change TID The following Change TID dialog box appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu e 99 Old TIL SITETHET New TID i pen Cancel 2 Type in the new TID The OK button is enabled 3 Click OK NOTE A TID consists of a string of alphanumeric characters See the NE documentation for a list of the restrictions on the TID character set Change Password Purpose To change a CPro 2000 user s NE password This screen also appears when an FT 2000 OC 48 NE password expires Procedure 1 From the Edit pull down menu select Change Password The following Change Password Dialog box appears Old Password Reenter Password LY 2 Type in your current password in the Old Password field and press the Tab key Note that asterisks appear instead of the actual password Type in the new password in the New Password field and press the Tab key Reenter the new password in the Reenter Password field The OK button is enabled 3 Click OK NOTE The password consists of a string of alphanumeric or symbolic characters See your NE documentation for a list of the restrictions on the password character set 4 Ifany errors were made while typing in the old and new passwords an error message appe
33. CPro 2000 Program Files Compact automatically excludes the Help files from the installation Custom brings up the Select Components dialog box To exclude the Help Files from the installation leave the Help Files box unchecked CPro 2000 User Manual Rele Program Files Example Files Help Files Shared DLLs 14 Click Next to proceed with the installation The Select Program Folder dialog box appears Select Program Folder Adaptec Easy CO Creator Adobe Adobe Acrobat AFRICAN AMERICAN ART Compaq Utilities Connectivity Infrared CPro 2000 F 1 CPro 2000 78 0 15 Read the information in the Select Program Folder box follow the instructions then click Next to continue with setup 16 If you are installing a CD skip to Step 18 If you are installing diskettes the Setup Needs The Next Disk dialog box appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Installation e 13 Setup Needs The Next Disk ie Follow the instructions provided in the Setup Needs The Next Disk dialog box 17 Insert remaining CPro 2000 R 11 0 disks at the prompt then click OK Note that if you selected the Compact or Custom options earlier on in the installation process the system invites you to insert disk 4 after you have inserted disk 2 Disk 3 contains information on the Help files and are not included with the Compact or Custom options 18 For both installation types click Finish in the Setup Complete dialog box to
34. Cancel dialog box shows each of these commands as they are issued to the NEs You can press Cancel at any time during this process to cancel the CPro 2000 command This is particularly useful when you are in the middle of a lengthy operation such as a Partition Inventory and you want to halt the command process CAUTION Depending on how quickly you cancel a command some or all of the command might be completed anyway Check the AUI to see which commands if any have been completed For example in the case of creating or deleting an end to end path a partial set of cross connections might have been created or deleted Use the Cancel button with care CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 GUI Representations The following screens show examples of the Network Element View and the Subnetwork View in the CPro 2000 GUI The menu bar and toolbar are included in the displays The following is an example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is a DDM 2000 OC 3 The following is an example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is a DDM 2000 OC 3 with 29G Optical Line Interface Unit OLIU circuit pack in the main tributaries CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 43 The following is an example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is a DDM 2000 OC 3 with 24G Optical Line Interface Unit OLIV circuit pack in the main tributaries ial EB SNC 0C12 MM DDM 2000 OC 12 R7 0 44 o The User Interfaces G
35. EQPT Retrieve State Equipment RTRV STATE PATH Retrieve State Path RTRV STATE STSI1 Retrieve State STS 1 RTRV STS1 Retrieve STS 1 Reports STS1 RTRV SYNC Retrieve Synchronization 312 e Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 OC 12 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item RTRV ULSDCC Retrieve Upper Layer Section DCC SET ATTR ALM Set Attribute Alarm SET ATTR CONT Set Attribute Control SET ATTR ENV Set Attribute Environment SET DATE i SetDate oo SET FEAT sd Set Feature o SET FECOM Set Far End Communications SET LGN Cid SetLogin o SET LINK i Setink SET PASSWD Set Password Edit Change SET PMTHRES LINE Set Performance Monitoring Threshold hacia a SET PMTHRES SECT Set Performance Monitoring Threshold a M a SET PMTHRES STS1 Set Performance Monitoring Threshold SS E ee e T3 SET SECU SetSecwrity ti CC SET STATE EC1 SetState ECI iL SET STATE T3 SetStateT3 ooo o o SET SYNC Set Synchronization Z ooo SWITCH FN_ Protection Switch Function Unit SWITCH LINE Protection Switch Line SWITCH PATH STS1 Switch Path STS 1 ooo o o SWITCH SYNC Protection Switch Synchronization SWITCH TSI Protection Switch Time Slot Interchange TEST ALM_ TestOffice Alarm Ci TEST AUTO Test Auto Turnmup Z Z o o o o TEST LED Test LED Indicators CE o TEST SYSCTL Test System Controllers S o _TEST TLM PAR Test Telemetry Parallel CC TEST T
36. Generic Software Version ID DLP 545 Make VT1 5 DS1 or STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Linear or Add Drop Configuration DLP 546 Make VT1 5 DS1 or STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Single Ring Configuration DLP 550 Make VT1 5 DS1 or STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Dual Ring Interworking Configuration Release 7 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commandse 309 310 e Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual Command Set Purpose The purpose of this section is to provide a cross reference between the Commands and Reports section of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 Cross Reference Table DDM 2000 OC 12 commands reports that do not have an entry in the CPro 2000 Menu column are not supported in CPro 2000 However since CPro 2000 allows concurrent access to both the GUI and AUI you can always enter the commands that are not supported on the CPro 2000 menus from the AUI window OC 12 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item CPY PROG Copy Program es DLT CRS STS1 Delete Cross Connection STS 1 X Conn Network Element Delete DLT TADRMAP Delete TID Address MAP ae ENT CRS STS1 Enter Cross Connection STS 1 X Conn Network Element Enter INIT PM Initialize Performance Monitoring Initialize System E IN
37. INI File Editor e support for password aging on NEs e support for DS1 provisioning for IMA LAN e ability to recognize and graphically represent Lucent s WaveStar products as unsupported NEs in the Subnetwork View e support for audible alarms and alarm paging e support for network alarm polling in MML on a DDM 2000 shelf supporting RNE Status CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Introduction e 7 8 e Introduction CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Installation Overview This chapter gives step by step details for installing CPro 2000 software CPro 2000 Release 11 0 software media is available in CD or 3 5 inch high density diskettes This chapter also explains how to customize CPro 2000 settings in accordance with your operating environment and preferences CPro 2000 Installation Procedure 1 Boot up your PC 2 Start Windows 95 98 or NT if Windows is not already running 3 Ifyou are installing a CD insert the CPro 2000 CD in the appropriate drive on your PC If you are installing diskettes insert the first of the six CPro 2000 installation diskettes into the 3 5 inch drive 4 Click on the Start button on the taskbar then click Run The Run dialog box appears 5 Type x setup in the command line box of the Run dialog box where x is the drive letter for your CD drive or floppy drive For example if you are installing a CD enter d setup if your CD drive is designated as drive d 6 Click OK
38. Mapping 61 How to Accomplish a al RCs Lc ene eee et a a vr et ne an ae en EN eT ee eT 61 AEE lt 6 a E E ee Tere ee eee ene ee eee eee 61 The Access Menu 69 VEVI sors caine A E E E 69 NA NOT a E E S E E E 70 OJ ole aie 10 11210516 E aa a E E ee eee i2 Close Subnei Work csn Nt ee a ns nT Rane eee a ee ee 13 Save SUDC WOTE ses a tte EEC Rr OO aor anne Ee eRe ee een neta 74 ne screw T E 110 6 E ce ne ee eC E nA Vets STE Sera RET SAEs geet Sm IE Ea 0a E E E EA et A EE NTs ETAT EE ARTEA ETE AN 76 OS Yy O e E aut cae asec ae 77 TT Wy ONS susen osc E EEE aoa aceuuicuaeas caamaces tana EEE anaes Fi LoD A E E E E L EOL O ee a E E E A E E E 78 Kode MinT O Ea E E TE EE eee 78 SA O 80 oe a E E E cedudstecteonweiaauates 81 Run Batch Commands xc aiawsiea donatonctrouenisnedonstanderotoumnndenst cnaemaetonadousscladuntneiotonstcadoaamiaetorsanicoreahnst 87 AELAD LTE o DNIE E EE N AI TEN ENOS ENNEA 88 Close Partion j sonerii saina e aloeosanencseashauenertconbsacecaaauaeseudcineaontnncetenddonaudetdodasnns 89 JDN AE ee E E E earn ise douoncaderaeseneseeetcseeet eeasnet 89 Pe E E E E E eeceesosouauereusadeecoseseuet 89 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu 91 le Wi acces torres T ENO E EE E E E EE E 91 Dac ee E E E E E E EE EE EAS 91 PESO eee tn On ne Snr OR ee oe ae eee eee 94 Caa e Dee eearnereenn eee ee E een er E an rere ar mee errr re mere mere ete 99 Chanae TSN 20 ee re E e O eee E E ee 100 ELOD a EE E N A T A N A AA AA 101
39. Network Element View and which communications standard Human Machine Language MML or Transaction Language One TL1 is the default SHOWCC can be either TRUE or FALSE When the entry is FALSE the slots ports containing cross connections are displayed in dark blue and the cross connection lines are not displayed When the entry 1s TRUE the slots ports containing cross connections are displayed in purple and green All of the cross connection lines are displayed as well NE IF DEFAULT can be either MML or TL1 depending on which command response type you are using most of the time MML is the current default This variable appears in the tabs at the top of the Login dialog box INVENTOR Y This section defines the number of NE inventories permitted before CPro displays a warning messsage regarding system resources NE INVENTORY LIMIT can be set to a value from 1 to 50 The default is 40 When this limit is exceeded a warning message is posted Once this limit is exceeded more NEs can still be inventoried the warning message will reappear However depending on hardware performance might eventually be reduced TIDS TID names are only applicable when using TL1 to connect to a subnetwork For TL1 you must supply a TID The entries in this section are a compilation of the TID names you use during the login process such as NODE1 or NODE XY Z Each time you type a new TID name into the login screen
40. Preferences To change the interface settings l 2 Bring up CPro 2000 R11 0 From the GUI click the Access menu and then select Edit CPro ini The CPro ini Preferences dialog box appears with the Interface Settings tab displayed Select your options An explanation of these options is provided in the Customizing CPro 2000 Setting sections of this chapter Note that with the exception of the Com Interface option changes in this tab take immediate effect The Com Interface option allows you to select the method of connection to the NE You can choose either a serial link or TCPIP connection However changes to the Com Interface take effect only after you exit the current session and restart CPro 2000 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the CPro ini dialog box or click Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected li The Com Port Defaults Tab From the Com Port Defaults tab you can specify your communications options To change the com port default settings l 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Bring up CPro 2000 R11 0 From the GUI click the Access menu then select Edit CPro ini The CPro ini Preferences dialog box appears with the Interface Settings tab displayed Click the Com Ports Defaults tab Installation e 19 i None in None F ei 1 g LK cance 4 Select your options
41. Provisioning Set NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach for more information 2 Choose a port address or AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address or AID box A list of all DS3 port addresses or AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a port address or AID is chosen you can click Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address or AID is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters 4 To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning EC1 Port Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select EC1 Ports The following dialog box displays for a DDM 2000 OC 3 or DDM 2000 OC 12 provided that there is at least one STS 1E circuit pack in the current node CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 167 ECI Port Provisioning Enter ECI Option Parameters Port Address Alarm Level EC1 Port Provisioning Enter ECI Option Parameters Port Aid PDIPS EBPD
42. STS 3 One way end to end path 226 STS 3 Two way end to end path 222 STS 3C Two way end to end path 218 Subnetwork map 317 385 Subnetwork view 1 7 18 25 26 27 35 39 41 43 46 52 58 59 62 63 65 72 75 78 80 81 87 88 91 101 103 105 109 111 14 193 195 201 203 4 207 222 226 253 270 283 Supported Network Elements 7 Switch DRI 63 91 101 Synchronous Optical Network SONET 1 System requirements 6 7 Tag Red Line 65 285 Target identifier TID 26 388 Task map 61 287 303 TCP IP 6 7 23 35 55 56 57 59 388 Technical assistance 5 Tile Horizontal 197 199 Tile Vertical 197 200 Timeslot Usage report 113 14 TL1 interface 24 Toolbar 39 41 43 52 56 58 63 76 79 103 4 132 135 36 138 140 142 144 146 148 149 151 52 Transparency Tab 20 Troubleshooting 5 6 22 37 329 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Two Endpoint end to end path 203 4 U Uninstall 14 15 Update Inventory 39 41 81 193 195 Update Menu 25 52 94 193 204 303 Update NE 65 162 172 User ID 31 35 36 70 71 77 84 86 94 V Video Service end to end paths 239 Video Source CO Site STS 3C cross connections 134 136 View Menu 52 57 58 77 103 107 109 10 303 VT1 5 cross connections 49 51 104 124 127 132 159 VT1 5 Drop and Continue cross connections 143 VT1 5 Locked cross connections 131 VT1 5 Locked end to end path 245 VT1 5 T1 Locked end to end path 249
43. Show X Conn 104 e The View Menu Purpose To display cross connections in a Network Element View Procedure 1 Inthe View pull down menu click Show X Conn A drop down menu appears Depending on the NE type the following choices are displayed e Select All displays all existing cross connections e STS 1 displays all STS 1 cross connections DDM 2000 only e VT1 5 displays all VT1 5 cross connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only e STS 3C displays all STS 3C cross connections DDM 2000 OC 12 e STS 3 displays all STS 3 cross connections FT 2000 only The cross connections are then displayed in the current Network Element View CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Hide X Conn Purpose To hide all cross connections while in a Network Element View Procedure 1 Inthe View pull down menu click Hide X Conn On the current Network Element View all cross connections are hidden Subnetwork View Purpose To display the Subnetwork View Procedure 1 Inthe View pull down menu click Subnetwork View A window is opened and the Subnetwork View is displayed Report Viewer Purpose To enable a user to perform functions such as viewing or printing a previously saved report or end to end path graphic See The Report Menu chapter for details on how to save a report to a file NOTE Do not use the Report Viewer to open files that are not report viewer files or end to end path graphics It is recommend
44. Support 3 Click OK to save the current settings to the INI file and dismiss the CPro ini dialog box or click Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings 22 Installation CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup Overview CPro 2000 is a user friendly tool for craft provisioning of SONET subnetworks This is accomplished by establishing a connection to an NE known as the local node in a SONET subnetwork and communicating to the rest of the subnetwork through this NE over the data communications channel DCC between all NEs in the subnetwork NOTE To access the NE connected to CPro 2000 you must have a user login on the NE If you do not have a user login on the NE see your network administrator Physical Connections OC 3 OC 12 and FT NEs have three ports to which CPro can connect e The DCE CIT1 is used for a direct connection e The DTE CIT2 is used for modem access or a direct connection through a null modem not available on a Fiber Reach shelf e The X 25 port is used for X 25 access an X 25 protocol device such as a packet assembler disassembler PAD or packet switched network is required FiberReach NEs do not support an X 25 port e A TCP IP network connection is used to connect to an NE by initializing a gateway device such as Lucent s NCC or a generic terminal server capable of supporting TCP IP interconnect such as Annex TL1 is allowed on the front CIT of DDM 2000 a
45. THE SOFTWARE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING AND OR USING THE SOFTWARE ACCOMPANYING THIS AGREEMENT INDICATES TOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT IN THE EVENT THAT YOU OO NOT AGREE WITH ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT RETURN YOUR INVOICE OR SALES RECEIPT AND THE SOFTWARE AND THE INVOICE WILL BE CANCELED OR ANY MONEY YOO PAID WILL BE REFUNDED LIMITED USE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT gt Do vou accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No Setup will close To install CPro 2000 A11 0 vou must accept thi agreement lt Back Tes No 9 Read the text in the Software License Agreement dialog box using the down arrow to scroll down to the remaining text 10 Click Yes if you accept the terms of the Agreement CPro 2000 User Manual Rele If you do not accept the terms of the Agreement Click No The Exit Setup box appears Exit Setup Click Exit Setup to exit the installation or click Resume to accept the terms of the Agreement and to continue the setup process If you accepted the terms of the Agreement the User Information dialog box appears Lucent Technologies 11 Enter your name in the Name field the company name in the Company field then press Next The Choose Destination Location dialog box appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Installation e 11 ase 11 0 12 e Installation Choose Destination Location Setup will install CPro 200
46. VT1 5 T1 Two way end to end path 211 W Window Menu 52 197 303 Window toggle 197 202 Work center personnel 2 X X 25 port 1 23 24 30 34 388 X Conns Menu 52 61 Index e 391 392 e Index CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0
47. When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter 2 You can click Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the DRI twoway icon fourth from left hand side of toolbar You can also select the Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists 3 Click OK and the following screen appears ls 2a 7 sts1 1w 6 27 SNC FT C1 SNC FT C1 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example for a two way STS 1 DRI cross connection _SNC FT D2 148 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter Two way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI PRI Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The cross connection must be established in the Add direction In other words the source must be a low speed slot and the destination must be a tributary The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties NOTE W
48. __ 10 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node in Ring B Click OK The main end to end path form appears EnterEnd To EndPath sss lt ssssisi is ziSS 11 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path x CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 281 12 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path 13 Click OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path FE OC3 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 1 2 282 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Delete End to End Path Purpose To delete an end to end path the Subnetwork View must be the current window so the End to End Path menu is available NOTE If you have created a locked arc end to end path containing two 0x1 cross connections CPro 2000 recognizes this as two separate paths You must delete each path individually Procedure l 2 From the End to End Path menu select Delete The following screen appears Delete End to End Path G2 stedet Delete Path F6 4_sts3 1e 5 a Close Source TID F6 2 De
49. address or AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the line address or AID box A list of all OC 3 line addresses or AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a line address is chosen click Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned If a line address or AID is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 165 4 To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning DS3 Port Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select DS3 Ports The following DS3 Provisioning dialog box appears for DDM 2000 Port Addres Mode AIS lalam Level Failure Threzhat PH Hode The following DS3 Provisioning dialog box appears for FT 2000 166 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 EQPDEPRPT NOTE The EQPDEPRPT parameter value displayed in the EC1 Port Provisioning dialog box corresponds to the value selected in the FT 2000 OC 48 NE Options dialog box Refer to
50. all the important information about the path 4 Click Modify Path and the following dialog box appears indicating that the modifications to LocA and LocZ are complete If at any time you want to cancel this operation click Close Modify Loca Locz X o Modification to LocA Loc for this End To End Path is successfully completed 5 Click OK Tag Red Line Purpose The End to End Path menu contains the Tag Red Line menu item This enables the user to protect against the accidental deletion of a path used for high priority services By selecting this menu item the user can tag an end to end path as Redlined This status then applies to all cross connections in the path When tagged as Redlined the end to end path cannot be deleted without first being untagged If an attempt is made to delete a Redlined end to end path a message informs the user that the path is Redlined and cannot be deleted The Redline status of a cross connection can be seen in the GUI status bar when the cross connection is highlighted single clicked Redline status is also indicated in the reports that can be generated for cross connections and end to end paths Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Tag Red Line The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 285 oF Tag Red Line Tributary 1 Source TID F6 4 Destination TID FB 1 List of cross connections TID F6 4
51. and AUI you can always enter the commands that are not supported on the CPro 2000 menus from the AUI window CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item CNVT CRS Convert Cross Connection CPY PROG Copy Program OO DLT ASNE Delete Alarm Services NE M DLT CRS STS1 Delete Cross Connection STS 1 X Conn Network Element Delete DLT CRS VT1 Delete Cross Connection VT1 5 X Conn Network Element Delete DLT TADRMAP Delete TID Address MAP fee l ENT CRS STS1 Enter Cross Connection STS 1 X Conn Network Element Enter CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commandse 305 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item ENT CRS VT1 Enter Cross Connection VT1 5 X Conn Network Element Enter ENT ULSDCC Enter Upper Layer Section DCC ee d INIT PM Initialize Performance Monitoring JINIT SYS_ Initialize System o o INS PROG Install Program o o o OPR ACO Operate Alarm Cutoff OPR LPBK EC1 Operate Loopback EC1 OPR LPBK T1 Operate Loopback TI OPR LPBK T3 Operate Loopback T3 PRESET Reset i O RLS LPBK ECI Release Loopback ECI RLS LPBK T1 Release Loopback TI RLS LPBK T3 Release Loopback T3 RTRV ATTR ALM_ Retrieve Attribute Alam o o RTRV ATTR CONT_ Retrieve Attribute Control J RTRV ATTR ENV_ Retrieve Attribute Environment Connections Connections RTRV EC1 Retrieve EC 1 Reports EC1 RTRV EQPT Retrieve Equipment Update Network Element Invent
52. any Windows based graphics package that accepts input from the Windows clipboard 4 From the Edit pull down menu select Paste A copy of the window appears 5 From the File pull down menu select Print and the window is printed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 59 60 e The User Interfaces CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Task Mapping How to Accomplish a Task Task Map The best way to accomplish a task that you are unfamiliar with in CPro 2000 is to find the task in the table below and determine which menu contains the commands you need Each task listed in the table below is described in detail in the next few chapters of this guide The table here and the detailed descriptions in the subsequent chapters are all organized by menus accessible from the menu bar at the top of the GUI window NOTE Creating and deleting cross connections is not performed through a menu These commands are performed using drag and drop technology The X Conns menu contains instructions for how to create and delete cross connections it does not contain a menu of commands For the purposes of this Task Map cross connection activities are listed under X Conns The menu bar at the top of the GUI window contains all of the functionality of CPro 2000 The menus can be accessed by clicking on the appropriate word in the menu bar using the mouse Each menu contains a grouping of similar tasks The tasks that can be accomplishe
53. at an STS 3C signal rate in a single ring DDM 2000 OC 12 only e locked path at a VT1 5 signal rate in a single ring DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only In creating end to end VT cross connects CPro 2000 makes cross connects at every node in the DDM 2000 ring At the two add drop nodes CPro 2000 always makes a VT cross connect However at the through nodes CPro 2000 can make either an STS or VT through cross connects depending on the types of optical packs in the main Equipping the main slots of a DDM 2000 OC 3 or a FiberReach shelf with 24G type OLIUs allows the shelf to transmit at an OC 12 rate Instead of VT cross connects CPro 2000 makes through cross connects as STS 1 Note however that the 24G type OLIU is restricted to making VT cross connects in 3 of the 12 STS s allowing the ring to use more of the limited VT bandwidth for VT drops Equipping the main slots of a DDM 2000 OC 3 or a FiberReach shelf with 29G type OLIUs allows the shelf transmit at an OC 12 rate CPro 2000 supports full STS 3C STS 1 and VT cross connects with this shelf configuration Note however that STS 3C cross connections can be created only if the Function Unit C fn c is equipped with a 22 type OLIU Unlike 24G OLIUs the NE equipped with 29G OLIUs can make through cross connections with VT granularity CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 203 End to end paths can be established only after taking a Partition Inventory Howev
54. batch file override settings provided in the AUI whether by user entry or a settings file Printing Reports and Windows 58 e The User Interfaces CPro 2000 can print reports and some windows directly from the GUI All reports that can be viewed through the Report Viewer such as the reports created using the Reports menu can be printed to your local printer See the Report Viewer section in The View Menu chapter for additional details You can print the Subnetwork View using the Print command in the Access menu or the Print toolbar icon See the Print Window section in The Access Menu chapter for additional details You can also print other GUI windows and AUI information such as a Network Element View or a captured AUI screen using Microsoft Paint or the Notepad editor See the following section Printing AUI Screens for instructions on how to capture information in the AUI and print it to your local printer See the Printing Windows section later in this chapter for instructions on how to print windows from the GUI that are not supported by the Print Window command Printing AUI Screens To print information that appears in the AUI screen use the following procedure Procedure For connection via serial link 1 Inthe AUI from the Capture pull down menu select Visible or Standard and then select Start The following screen appears Save B Save in E CFroA 11 0 ZI ia a E i3 Save as
55. choosing Backup from the Edit pull down menu the following screen displays Select File for Backup of Network Element york J progra 1 Ey cprorl1 0 Backup Files brm F Navigate to the CPro 2000 installation directory to access the Backup Files If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 1 cpror1 1 0 2 Specify a file name for your backup file If you choose a name that is already in use a warning appears Select File for Backup of Network Element A e If you want to overwrite the existing file with a new one click Yes e If you do not want to replace the existing file click No then rename the new file 3 Click Cancel to cancel the entire operation Click OK to perform the backup NOTE If you are connected to the NE being backed up via MML the extension appended to the backup file is brm which stands for backup restore MML If you are connected to the 92 e The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 NE being backed up via TL1 the extension appended to the backup file is brt which stands for back restore TL1 The following screen displays CPro 2000 R11 0 4 Click Yes to perform the backup Click No to cancel the backup The following summary report appears when the backup has been successfully completed Backup Report tmprep tmp CPro 2000 Backup summary Report for O
56. click means to click the left mouse button twice in quick succession for example Double click on the CPro icon to start CPro 2000 e Drag means to press the left mouse button and to continue pressing while moving the mouse for example Drag the cursor from the source slot of the cross connection to the destination slot e Drop means to release the mouse button after dragging the cursor to the desired location on the GUI for example Drop the cursor on the destination slot 2 e About This Manual CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Keyboard Conventions e The names of keys that appear on your keyboard are shown in bold type with an initial capital letter for example the Shift key or the Escape key e Press the Enter key means that you can press either Enter or Return This initiates an action in CPro 2000 On most PC keyboards these two keys perform the same operations In CPro 2000 they can be used interchangeably unless specifically stated otherwise e All the keyboard shortcuts that are valid in any other Windows application are also valid in CPro 2000 such as pressing the Tab key to move the cursor from field to field in a window CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 About This Manual e 3 4 e About This Manual CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Introduction The Concept of CPro 2000 CPro 2000 is a Windows application that provides access to Lucent Technologies SONET NE
57. click the source slot of the cross connection e To create a contiguous range such as m 1 1 1 m 1 1 2 m 1 1 3 and so on of cross connections hold the Shift key on your keyboard and click on each of the additional slots or click on the last slot the slots in between are automatically chosen in your range e To create a noncontiguous range such as ml 1 1 m 1 1 3 m 1 2 1 and so on of cross connections hold down the Control key and click on each of the additional slots in the range 2 Release the Shift or Control key and while holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the first destination slot of the range of cross connections The following screen appears when you release the mouse button CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 143 NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a range of drop and continue cross connections e One address range in the cross connection must be in a main and one address range must be in low speed slots 3 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the drop and continue icon from the toolbar 4 Click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter 5 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connections individually Click Yes to All if you want to establish the entire range of cross connections in one step Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection
58. close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 191 192 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Update Menu Overview From a Network Element View you can update the following information in CPro 2000 using the Update Menu e Inventory e xX Conn e Alarm e Active User From the Subnetwork View you can update the following information in CPro 2000 using the Update Menu e Update Map e Update Inventory These menu items are detailed in the following procedures Inventory NE View Purpose To retrieve the NE equipage and update the Network Element View accordingly CPro 2000 maintains all information relating to the Update Inventory command in a temporary data location When the Update Inventory command is completed successfully the Network Element View is redisplayed This menu item is only available from a Network Element View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Inventory The current NE s inventory is updated and the Network Element View is redisplayed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Update Menu e 193 X Conn NE View Purpose To retrieve the NE cross connections and update a Network Element View by displaying the current cross connections CPro 2000 maintains all information relating to the Update X Conn command in a temporary data location When the Update X Conn command is
59. described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Map A report similar to the following appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu e 115 lt lt Map Report tmprep tmp CPro 2000 Mar Benge for Tae DIN 2000 OLC 12 Rro nh 8 Se March 19 1999 19 15 _ nm E Neighbor Map for LSl lzZ 3 sont sate ee TIL Connected Thru Product Type Lewel z I ar Fra ho oS eee oo Heo ESE DPDM OC1LZ y s9684 0F 20 OOOO00 d d O000 OOOO OS0064AlBSCYS OO neh eee n an sees main h 1 S9840F 20 ddd OOO0 OO000 OOOO OS0064aAlBSSCL OO St Gade main h Z 39840F 80 oooo000g oO00 0000 0000 O8006A81B58C1 00 SitelNEl n a S3840F 50 oooo00 d da ooo0 ae OSO006A1BS AF OO tanan s a ta a n a n n n m n n n n n n n n n m n n m n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n a n n n n n n a n a n a n n n m a n n a n n m a n n n n n n a n n n n m a a a a agen cc E E O oO g a eae a q KS i Ls m 7 r 7 m sass l l oJ r jA l Cu 116 e The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Alarms Purpose To display an alarm summary for the current node The alarms report option is only available from a Network Element View As des
60. dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 R6 2 GUI 0C12 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 R5 1 2 jo Tea ee en _ C1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 269 Four Node Interworking End to End Paths Interoffice Ring Application A form in the CPro 2000 End to End Path menu supports the creation of a four node interworking end to end path which is used for interoffice ring applications To create a four node interworking end to end path access the End to End Path menu while in the Subnetwork View A form appears prompting the selection of the signal rate and path type The selection of these two options dynamically changes the form to reflect the information needed to create that specific type of path There are two types of four node end to end paths supported by CPro 2000 e STS 1 four node interworking DDM 2000 e VT1 5 four node interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 7 2 9 0 11 0 11 1 and 15 0 NOTES CPro 2000 R11 0 does not support the following e Four node interworking end to end paths on an FT 2000 e The establishment of STS 1 or VT1 5 four node interworking end to end paths when an intervening node exists between either the primary and secondy nodes one ring Ring A or between the primary and secondary nodes another ring Ring B When constructing interoffice rings it is necessary to hav
61. e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 W Other Node s Add Drop Node 2 Ring Transport Service In Ring Transport Service the NEs in one ring are used to provide service for NEs in another ring One ring is at a higher signal rate than the other ring The function units in one or two of the NEs in the ring with the higher signal rate connect to the mains of one or two NEs in the ring with the lower signal rate Since connectivity is established through the mains the connection is always optical The ring at the higher signal rate is called the parent and it is this ring that provides the transport for the other ring shown as Ring 1 in the following illustration The other ring the child ring is incomplete without the parent ring because the fibers in the child ring do not form a complete circle on their own This is known as an open ring Ring Transport Service is applicable to the following configurations e FT 2000 OC 48 can provide transport to a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring e DDM 2000 OC 3 can provide transport to a FiberReach ring e DDM 2000 OC 12 can provide dual and single homed transport to a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring The following sample illustration shows two NEs in the parent ring connected to two NEs in the child ring This is called dual homing Single homing is when the function unit of one NE in the parent ring is connected to two mains in the child ring CPro 2000 User Manua
62. example PAUSE 1000 means wait for one second and PAUSE 40000 means wait for 40 seconds The pause quantity should be modified to meet your specific needs The most common use of the PAUSE command is fora WAITFOR XXX statement where XXX is an action that may not work correctly For example after logging into a DDM 2000 but before the user prompt appears the system requests the user to supply a carriage return Instead of using WAITFOR carriage return to continue the script can simply PAUSE 1000 Example Data Communications Script File The text shown below is a sample data communications script file start of script SeuLcings Teom 96007737 1 none connect pause 500 Eran series EEEN pause 500 if connect fail user msg The connection attempt to the comport failed exit transmitt ie pause 1000 tEransmict Tg pause 1000 transmitt r pause 1000 330 e Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 waitfor DESTINATION 0 if waitfor fail error msg No DESTINATION prompt was found goto DISCONNECT pause 500 In the following line you can replace the macro call S CONNECT_STRING with an actual connection string Alternatively enter a default value in the macro definition below transmitt S CONNECT STRING xr pause 500 Erarnsmitt 4g pause 500 transmite TAr pause 500 transom io Try paus
63. for a two way pager Click Send to start to send the text message to the specified pager number You should hear a dial tone and the sound of the modem dialing as it attempts to make a connection or Click Clear to remove any entries from both the Subscriber Pager Number and the Message Text fields If you clicked Send the following message appears Connecting If you click Send again while transmission is in progress the following message appears Alarm Click OK to return to the Pager Test page Notice that the Message Test field title has changed to reflect the current status of the transmission Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings The Alarms Menu e 301 302 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 The Help Menu Overview The Help Menu contains on line help topics based on the contents of this user manual The on line help consists of the following topics e About This Manual e Introduction e Installation e CPro 2000 Startup e The User Interfaces e Task Mapping e The Access Menu e The Edit Menu e The View Menu e The Report Menu e Cross Connections e The Provision Menu e The Update Menu e The Window Menu e The End to End Path Menu e The Alarms Menu e The Help Menu The Help Menu also contains About CPro 2000 which provides information about the current release CPro
64. in the subnetwork It uses the information saved in the file This command is only available when no connection to a subnetwork is currently active Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Open Subnetwork The following screen appears and prompts you to select the file that contains the previously saved information for this subnetwork on E3 progra 1 E cprorl1 0 Navigate to the CPro 2000 installation directory to access the Subnetwork Files If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 1 cprorl 11 0 72 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 2 Click OK to open the subnetwork using the information saved in this file At any time you can click Cancel to dismiss the window and not open the subnetwork NOTE If CPro 2000 determines that there is a conflict between your saved subnetwork and the current subnetwork due to changes in the subnetwork a warning message will appear You then have the option of choosing Re Start to reestablish the subnetwork Continue to keep your saved version CPro 2000 may not work correctly or Cancel to disconnect from the subnetwork 3 The following Login dialog box displays The Partition Map and Partition Inventory options are not available for selection Since you are opening a subnetwork using previously saved information CPro 2000 will not gather new data during login TID UserlD NOTE If you are connecti
65. is loaded e two button mouse e sound card to enable Audible Alarm e modem card to enable Alarm Pager e VGA monitor e LAN interface if TCP IP connection is desired NOTE It is recommended that at least a 256 color mode be used 128 MB RAM is recommended for use with large networks Software CPro 2000 Release 11 0 runs on the following platforms Microsoft Windows 95b Windows 98 Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4 0 NOTE CPro 2000 Release 11 0 does not support Microsoft Windows 3 1 or Microsoft Windows 95a CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Supported Network Elements CPro 2000 provides an intelligent common GUI for Lucent Technologies SONET NEs including DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FiberReach FT 2000 OC 48 and the SONET functionality of SLC 2000 CPro 2000 Release 11 0 provides an interface for the following NE Releases DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 13 0 13 5 15 x DDM 2000 OC 12 Release 7 x FiberReach Releases 3 0 3 1 and 4 0 FT 2000 OC 48 Releases 8 1 9 0 and 9 1 SLC 2000 the SONET portion if installed with OC 3 R13 0 Releases 4 4 and 4 6 MegaStar support for the SONET portion only as DDM 2000 OC 3s NOTE CPro 2000 Release 11 0 fully supports only the NE Releases listed above New Features Listed below are the significant new features in CPro 2000 Release 11 0 e ability to connect to an NE either through a serial port or over TCP IP e ability to edit the INI file using the
66. m 6 column The horizontally arranged boxes at the bottom of the screen correspond to the function units used for add drop cross connections To remove an existing STS 1 view from the VT box double click the heading of that box Note that removing the view does not delete any associated cross connections For DDM 2000 OC 3 NEs equipped with 29G or 24G OLIU circuit pack in the mains The top box on each side represents the STS 1 STS 3 interface Each of these boxes has four rows and four columns The four entries in each row represent the STS 3 termination points and the three associated STS 1 termination points The vertically stacked boxes on each side represent the STS 1s that have been selected for either VT1 5 cross connections or STS 1 add drop cross connections The horizontally arranged boxes at the bottom of the screen correspond to the function units used for add drop cross connections For FT 2000 OC 48 NEs The West side displayed on the left side represents interfaces to the west STS 3 high speed tributaries with three STS 1 tributaries contained in each STS 3 The East side displayed on the right side represents interfaces to the east STS 3 high speed tributaries with three STS 1 tributaries contained in each STS 3 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 51 52 e The User Interfaces The horizontally arranged boxes at the bottom of the screen display four groups of low spe
67. menu bar or by using shortcut key combinations See the Task Mapping section for a listing of menu items and shortcut key commands The Alarms menu commands are e Auto Alarm Polling e Audible Alarms e Pager e Preferences Lee FU AT Den ee YSU Ss ATE Mi E es Fy Ei a 4 a l T F il a a q 2152 Hiei oa CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Alarms Menu e 287 ase 11 0 The Alarm feature in CPro 2000 Release 11 0 supports two types of alarm reporting local and network For local alarm reporting CPro 2000 Release 11 0 supports the following NE releases e DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 13 0 13 5 and 15 x e DDM 2000 OC 12 Releases 7 0 and 7 1 e DDM 2000 FiberReach Releases 3 0 3 1 and 4 0 e FT 2000 OC 48 Releases 8 1 9 0 and 9 1 For network alarm reporting CPro 2000 Release 11 0 supports the following NE releases e DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 15 x e DDM 2000 FiberReach Release 4 0 and above In reporting network alarms CPro 2000 reports the highest level of alarm in the polled network However the following conditions must exist for CPro 2000 to report network alarms e The RNE must be enabled for each node to be monitored e The network must have at least one AGNE e The network must be in the same alarm group NOTE The Audible Alarm and Pager features are only available when Auto Alarm Polling is enabled turned on Therefore the Audible Alarm and Pager options are grayed out when Aut
68. network values for Group ID and Length are not changeable 4 Click Set Value to activate the new security options 5 Click Close at any time to end the session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value your changes will not be saved The Provision Menu e 187 Provisioning Set Security DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 and FiberReach Release 4 0 Purpose To conveniently provision port security and to configure the front and rear CIT from CIT MML to TLI and back again from within a CPro session From this window users can to any of the following change the port configuration from MML mode to TL1 and back to TL1 without exiting a CPro 2000 session Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set Security The following screen appears for DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 and FiberReach Release 4 0 SET SECURITY Port Provisioning Enter SET SECURITY Option Parameters Part Type Baud Rate Echo Security Time out min NOTE Although the Set Security screen for DDM OC3 R15 0 and FiberReach R4 0 appear identical the Address options differ as shown below Address options for DDM OC3 R15 0 Enter SET SECURITY Option Parameters Poe en pae Y k cit Port Type Baud Rate Address options for FiberReach R4 0 188 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter SET SECURITY Option Parameters Ad d Tess it 1 K C Port Type 2 Click Get Value to disp
69. number prefix for an outside line In some settings a prefix might be required in order to access an outside phone line The To access an Outside Line first dial field is where you specify a prefix the system must dial to access an outside phone line To specify a number prefix 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Type the prefix in the To access an Outside Line first dial field 3 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected Viewing the Pager Log File The Pager Log File tracks the activities of the pager To view the log file CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Alarms Menu e 293 3 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed Select View from the Pager Log File section If no Pager Log File exists the follow message appears If a Pager Log File exists a text file similar to the following appears Terr ft d c Bye l WENTYCHARACTERSLONG g mee ee a nt1ifiled on e Pager Enabled Date and time pager feature was enabled If an alarm is detected in the networks while pager is enabled the following information is also displayed Message sent Alarm type and TID Pager number
70. or the Subnetwork View are not open e Click Switch To to change the focus of the CPro 2000 GUI to the Subnetwork View or to an NE that is open The SNW View icon or an opened NE icon must be selected for Switch To to be available e Click Login to log into an NE e Click Logout to log out of the chosen node The Logout option is only available when you are logged into a node e Click Close NodeMan to close the Node Manager The Node Manager also closes each time you complete a task CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 e Click one of the partition icons The Set Access Update Map Update Inventory and Rename buttons are activated Click Set Access to specify user IDs and passwords for CPro 2000 to use when inventorying or mapping a partition See the section that follows for more information about this feature Click Update Map to get an updated view of that partition in the Subnetwork View Click Update Inventory to update the information for that partition such as cross connections and port provisioning Click Rename to give the partition a new name The following screen displays Enter new name for the ox partition _ OK Cancel Enter the new partition name and click OK For example you may want to give the partition a name that reflects the makeup of the partition Click Cancel if you do not want to rename the partition Set Access You set access when you predefine user IDs and pas
71. or type signal degrade thr concat mode application os3 1 nsa ais rtrv o 3 Port amp Line set oc 12 rtrv oc12 kbyte message syncmsg or type signal degrade nsa ais Channel set sts 1 rtrv sts 1 signal degrade xconn must exist Sa als AID must be all nsa ais rtrv sts1 primary state Channel set sts3c rtrv sts3c signal degrade xconn must exist amp Sa als feat sts3c enabled nsa ais AID must be all set state sts3c rtrv sts3c primary state X conn set crs rtrv crs x connection type ring id rtrv ors sts3c a rtrv crs sts SS Perf set pmthres sect rtrv pmthres sect See SpecCond 630 txpwrldb txpwr2db laser bias sefs qhour sefs day CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 367 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 set pmthres line rtrv pmthres line See SpecCond 630 b2 cv oc12 b2 cv oc3 b2 cv ecl b2 es b2 esa b2 esb b2 ses b2 uas psc l set pmthres sts 1 rtrv pmthres sts 1 See SpecCond 630 KK KKK KK RK set pmthres t3 rtrv pmthres t3 See SpecCond 630 cvl esl ses sefs Kx KK pev cv p fmcv cp esp sesp uas p sefsfe cbit cv pfe espfe sespfe uaspfe x KKK KM KK KK MK 368 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Comm
72. page either backward or forward You can also click the Page box and edit the current page number to the page number you want NOTE The Page Up and Page Down keys on your PC keyboard do not work in the Report Viewer Also the scroll bar appearing on the right side of the Report Viewer does not take you to the next page of the report the scroll bar only takes you from top to bottom of an individual page Use the arrows as described above to access the next or previous page of the report e The Print function brings up an abbreviated Print menu so that your report can be printed e The Save function allows you to save your report to a file name so that it can be accessed at a later time through the Report Viewer command in the View menu e The Close function enables you to close the report without saving it to a file unless you have already done so using the Save function e The Settings function offers a full selection of print settings Use the Close Settings command to return to the basic report functions but not to close the report CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The View Menu e 107 108 e The View Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu Overview The Report Menu contains commands that display information about end to end paths cross connections equipment alarms port options and history Any reports may be saved to a file and accessed at a later time by using the Report Viewer command in the View menu
73. removing these CPro 2000 sends the restore commands one by one 6 Click Yes to continue NOTE If any differences have been discovered and reported the restore operation may be canceled by clicking No The user can then correct any differences before proceeding Note that if the restore 1s continued in spite of reported differences some restore commands may fail CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu e 97 7 For earlier releases of DDM 2000 and FiberReach the following window displays if the system detects any commands that would cause a reset and or result in the loss of DCC connectivity You must manually copy and paste these commands into the AUI Instructions are given below File Edit Search Help E cPro 2090 jHanual Restore Report for OC3 6 DDH 206000 OC 3 R11 1 September 23 1999 16 58 The Following commands need to be entered to complete the restore These commands may cause loss of communication to the NE and or reset jThese commands may be directly copied to the AUI window WARNING Change the TID last commands showing Tid t If the TID is changed in the AUI CPro will need to be reset set ne AlmGrp 255 AGNE yes DSNE no ite 1 NE 5 IDLE ais Shelf 1 CORT RT TbAddr 1 TbL To complete the restore process manually enter commands that appear in the Notepad window by doing the following e Select the entire command line including the semicolon e Copy the command by either pressin
74. report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Protection State A report similar to the following appears 120 e The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Network Element Protection Switching State Report tmprep tmp CPro Zood Protection Switching State Report for FT6 2 FT 2000 OC 46 R9 O March 21 1999 15 46 ee Report of protection switching state ee Output of RTRY STATE command soe ce Er 3927083221 3 42 24 see ieg Ll DCS ACT tg z TCG3 4CT see derut EMPERE ACT 4 oe trmtr ly TRMTBR act nm TEES E E aE 5 Port Slot Options Purpose To provide a list of port and or line options for the current node The port slot options report is only available from a Network Element View As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report The following port and line options are supported e All DS1 Ports DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only e All T1 Ports FiberReach only e All DS3 Ports Not applicable to FiberReach e All ECI Ports Not applicable to FiberReach e All NCT 2 Ports DDM 2000 OC 3 e All LS Ports FT 2000 only e All OC 1 Lines DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only e All OC 3 Lines e All OC 12 Lines DDM 2000 OC 12 and FT 2000 only e All OC 48 Lines FT 2000 only CPro 2000 User
75. resolve any problems that occur while working with CPro 2000 refer to the CPro 2000 Software Release Description SRD that accompanies this manual or refer to the Readme file in the CPro 2000 software To access the Readme file select CPro 2000 R11 0 from the Start Menu then choose CPro 2000 R11 0 Readme from the submenu The Troubleshooting sections of both the SRD and Readme file contain specific information for resolving issues It is recommended therefore that you review these prior to requesting customer assistance CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 37 38 e CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces Overview This chapter contains a detailed explanation of CPro 2000 s GUI Graphical User Interface and AUI ASCII User Interface It explains the menus color conventions and how to navigate the user interfaces The GUI section defines the various components it contains such as the following e toolbar icons e Subnetwork View e Network Element View e the status bar and alarm representations Also provided in this chapter is a section on how to print reports and windows from the user interfaces Introduction to the User Interfaces CPro 2000 provides both a GUI and an AUI to access Lucent Technologies NEs When you start CPro 2000 by selecting CPro 11 0 Graphical User Interface from the Start button the GUI forms a relationship with the AUI The AUI receives informatio
76. screen appears 10 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node in Ring B Click OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 275 11 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path x 12 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path O 13 Click OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path gt gt CPro 2000 R6 2 GUI 0C3 4 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 12 276 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter a VT1 5 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for VT1 5 signal rate and 4 Node Intwk path type 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the primary node in Ring A Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 3 Select the low speed slot for the primar
77. screen appears when you release the mouse button CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 137 Cross Connection Properties sts3 1w 9 gt sks3 le 9 NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter 2 You can click Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the one way cross connection icon from the toolbar If available you can also select Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists 3 Click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Destination TID eroan JA no JA Conce 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example for a one way STS 3 cross connection 138 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 l F6 1 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R81 o x The following example represents a one way STS 1 cross connection created by using the same procedure described above for a one way STS 3 cross connection l F6 1 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 1
78. that you specify a pager number for every alarm level This ensures that for every network alarm the appropriate call list number is paged NOTE You can associate the same pager user name and pager number with one or more alarms For example a pager user John Doe with a pager number 222 2222 can be associated with both major and critical alarms To do so enter John Doe s name and number twice associating the first entry with major alarms and the second entry with critical alarms The system calls John Doe s pager number only if either a major or a critical alarm is detected 10 Click OK from within the Call List page to save your entries Viewing the Call List 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab to display the call list l 3 Click the Up or Down arrows to view the names in the call list 4 To edit the Call List press Edit To add more entries to the list click Add To delete the entry click Delete For detailed information on how to perform each of these tasks see the appropriate sections of this chapter Editing call list entries To change any of the parameters associated with a pager user name 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab to display the call list page 3 Click Edit to activate the fields in th
79. the backbone of CPro 2000 Once communication 1s established with the local node CPro 2000 is able to communicate with the other NEs in the subnetwork All of the information that CPro 2000 provides through the GUI is obtained directly from the NEs themselves Whenever an action is taken through the GUI CPro 2000 automatically updates the information that it has stored about the subnetwork The CPro 2000 GUI provides information to users based on data that it stores therefore it 1s possible for CPro 2000 to open a Network Element View or to provide reports without ever accessing the NE itself When CPro 2000 needs to retrieve information from or send information to the NE CPro 2000 logs into the NE that must be accessed CPro 2000 automatically accesses the appropriate NE because it keeps track of which NE it is currently logged into and compares that information to the NE that must be accessed When communication to a remote NE is lost or when the user accesses NEs via the AUI the GUI and AUI might indicate that they are logged into different NEs This can cause CPro 2000 to be unable to complete a specified task CPro 2000 is designed to correct this situation automatically and access the appropriate NE However if a problem occurs and CPro 2000 cannot correct this situation use the AUI to access the local node CPro 2000 will then be able to complete the specified task Note that for MML if you are logged out of the local node or off the subn
80. to the NE through a serial link or over TCP IP Some of these commands are also in the AUI toolbar The following lists the menu bar options available with both methods of connection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Serial Link Options Toolbar options from left to right Send Delete Character Capture Direct or Modem Modify Communications Modem Specifications Connect Disconnect and Run Script File el lajeja w Menu bar options from left to right The File Menu offers the Exit command for terminating the AUI and all other currently connected sessions including the GUI When MML connected the Edit Menu provides the Send Break and Del Char commands that can be used to abort a command This menu also contains the Modify Script File command which allows the user to open the Notepad editor and make changes to a user specified script file This menu also allows the user to copy and paste text that is displayed in the AUI The View Menu allows you to change the AUI window according to viewing needs The options that can be changed include hiding or displaying the status bar the font size and type and whether the window is displayed in color black and white or gray tones The Capture Menu gives you the ability to capture and save commands sent to and received from the NEs as they appear in the AUI These commands are saved to a file The Communications Menu contains commands for choosing connection preferences termin
81. type Capture Files cap Cancel 2 Enter a file name as requested Any information displayed in the AUI after Capture Start is chosen is saved to the file until Capture Stop is chosen 3 Inthe AUI select Stop from the Capture pull down menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Access the file created with Notepad or some other Windows word processing package that accepts text as input Select Print Setup and choose landscape or portrait depending on the page orientation of the report Select Print and click OK For connection over TCP IP l 2i gt In the AUI select the desired text Press Ctrl C to copy the text to the clipboard Open a text editor such as Notepad then press Ctrl V to copy the text from the clipboard Select Print Setup and choose landscape or portrait depending on the page orientation of the report Select Print and click OK Printing Windows To print a window that appears in the GUI such as a Network Element View use the following procedure NOTE To print the Subnetwork View see the Print Window section in The Access Menu chapter Procedure 1 Inthe GUI click the window you wish to print 2 Press the Print Screen key on your keyboard to place a copy of the entire screen in the Windows clipboard To place only the selected window in the clipboard press Alt Print Screen 3 Open Microsoft Paint located in the Accessories Program Group You can use
82. you want to view the entire report or choose By Date Time and then enter the desired Start Stop Dates and Start Stop Times Click OK You may click Cancel to close the window and no report is generated A report similar to the following appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Network Element History Report tmprep tmp CPro zo00 al History Report for SVC 1l12 1 DOM 2000 0C 12 R7 0 March 19 1999 19 59 Maintenance History Report Tate Time Sys Aln Source Event Lewel Description HSL 19 56 03 Zit remote session logout sae 13 54 55 lt cit z rlon UNENMOWN ID Dira See ae Gate remote session terminated soo T2 Il ou Cit z rlin UNEMOWN ID Hasla leet as Cll 2 remote session Logout eo Lolo sto cli rlin UNEMOWN ID DSI 19 0S7 s0 cit z login UMENOWN IL Ee ia E ae aa x25 login LUCOL HSL USs0e2s0 x25 login LUCOL 4 View Page N of 23 Equipment Purpose To view a report that shows the equipage for the current node The equipment report option is only available from a Network Element View As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report NOTE CPro 2000 obtains network equipment information from the RTRV EQPT command If the equipage for the NE has changed run an update on the NE using the Update Menu to re inventory the NE in CPro 2
83. 0 A11 0 in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder ou can choose not to install CPro 2000 A11 0 by clicking Cancel to exit Setup Destination Folder C Program Files CProR11 0 Browse Cancel 12 Click Browse to change the directory from the one specified in the Choose a Destination Location dialog box then click Next To accept the default directory location click Next The Setup Type dialog box appears Setup Type Click the type of Setup you prefer then click Hest Program will be installed with the most common options Recommended for most users C Compact Program will be installed with minimum required options Custom Tou may choose the options you want to install Recommended for advanced users lt Back Cancel NOTE If the CPRO INI file or the DEFAULT SCR file already exists from a previous installation in the directory where CPro 2000 is being installed a message that the existing versions of the files have been saved in different files appears The earlier CPRO INI file is saved as cpro2 ini while the earlier DEFAULT SCR file is saved as default2 scr For information on how to customize the CPRO INI file or the DEFAULT SCR file see the Customizing CPro 2000 Settings section of this chapter 13 Select the preferred installation from the following Setup options Typical installs all
84. 0 OC 3 and FiberReach 126 Enter Hairpin Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 c ccc ceeeeeeeseseseseesesseeeeeeees 127 Enter Single 0x1 STS 1 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter Single 0x1 VT1 5 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 cceceeeeeeees 128 Enter Dual 0x1 STS 1 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter Dual 0x1 VT1 5 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 or Enter Dual 0x1 STS 3 Cross Connection FiberReach equipped with 22 type circuit pack 129 Enter VT1 5 Locked Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach 131 Enter a Range of Two way VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and Me AICI REEN erea E A E AE E AE E A 132 Enter Video Source COV STS 3C Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 12 134 Enter Video Sink RTV STS 3C Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 12 136 Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 137 Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 1 1 Protected OC 3 Cross Connection CE OTOT OCA carr veda sacaguedieuensestuetaxcosnvanvacouuedueseseednadpancscasusevssenissenesesnsaeavectueaaas 139 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Contentse iii iv e Contents Enter STS 1 Drop and Continue Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter VT1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 142 Enter a Range of VT1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM2000 Vie ceeeos e sssciesce ssc tea gen se taeansaesanenadedseyxeenasesxeasncasne
85. 0 User Manual Release 11 0 The Window Menu e 201 Window Toggle Purpose This feature allows the user to toggle easily between any open and iconified windows in the CPro 2000 GUI Procedure 1 At the bottom of the Window pull down menu the names of any open or iconified windows are displayed Click on your selection If the window is open it appears in front of any other windows If the window is iconified it is opened and displayed in front of any other open windows 202 e The Window Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu Overview The End to End Path Menu is available when the cursor is pointing to an unexpanded partition in a Subnetwork View and you press the right mouse button or from the menu bar at the top of the CPro 2000 GUI NOTE End to end paths cannot be created in linear configurations or rings containing an unsupported NE There are many different environments in which end to end paths are commonly created In the simplest situation the traffic originates and terminates within a ring Frequently however traffic is routed over a complex multi ring environment CPro 2000 can be used to create and validate several types of end to end paths as well as modify the LocA and or LocZ values in an existing STS 3 or STS 1 path in an FT 2000 OC 48 CPro 2000 supports the following path types e two endpoint end to end path including ring transport service across a single ring e video service
86. 00 User Manual Release 11 0 Parameter syncmsg or type signal degrade thr nsa ais application dcc mode syncmsg or type signal degrade thr nsa ais dcc mode primary state rimary state a rimary state fails if x conn exist Special Conditions Only if equipped with 24G or 29G OLIU r mary state x connection type ring id Only with 24G or 29G signaldegrade thr sa ais nsa ais signal degrade thr signal failure sa ais nsa ais See SpecCond 630 xmtr pwr Idb xmtr pwr 2db laser bias sefs e eee ee E E T Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 355 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued j U Nn ay Nn Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 13 0 Perf set pmthres line rtrv pmthres line See SpecCond 630 b2 cv oc3 b2 cv ocl b2 cv ecl b2 es b2 esa b2 esb b2 ses b2 uas psc l Perf set pmthres sts 1 rtrv pmthres sts 1 See SpecCond 630 KKK KK KK RK x KKK KM MK KKK KK KK RK x KKK KM MK KKK KK KK RK x KK KM Perf set pmthres t3 rtrv pmthres t3 See SpecCond 630 cv l es l ses l sefs pbit cv p cv p fmbit cv p cbit cv p es p ses p uas p sesfe cbit cv p fe es p fe ses p fe uas p fe KO KOAK KOKOAK KOKO AK x KKK KM KK KK MK KKK KM KK KK MK KKK KM KK KK MK 356 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Rel
87. 000 OC 48 and FiberReach Purpose Updates the system database on the NE to reflect the existing hardware configuration and incoming signals This menu item is not available for all NEs Procedure From the Provision pull down menu select Update NE and the system database is updated Provisioning OSI Parameters DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OSI Stack and then select Layer 3 or Layer 4 CAUTION Changing some Layer 3 parameters such as L3Area affects DCC connectivity If connectivity is interrupted check the Software Release Description or the ReadMe file for information on how to reestablish connection The following dialog box displays for Layer 3 172 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Provisioning of OSI Parameters Set Layer 3 051 Parameters fcar Curent Value E L3DFI L30RG L3RE T L4AJIDF LAAJDFI L4AJORG L4AJRES LAAJRE L4AJAREA L4AJSYS L4AJSEL ILATLIF 2 Click Get Value to see the current settings 3 To modify the settings type over them with the desired values and click Set Value CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 173 NOTE Some parameters are read only and cannot be changed See the appropriate Lucent Technologies User Service Manual for further details and acceptable values Provisioning OC 3 Line Options For FT 2000 OC 48 Only
88. 000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases Glossary of Terms Index CONNEC Ir cis sastiiconesiaca city onndawnedncetesesactcnnatacy antsencdennebatadebetontanesiadsapseontacunatonemetcanetearess 323 SETTINGS SHINO sarsii i aiaia ie 323 DOC ONIN GV re E EE E E A EA E EE 323 Functions Tanco S ae asc E EE E E E E EO ESEA 324 Tunein E a Lo eese E E E ES 324 Macros Macro Syntax Macro Example Using Functions and Macros Together ecaisedsaicixsaxentavedeintcesdacteveseateiuestavelvecsaccncestactiveseateiuextuet 326 CAPTURE C OTNI I a E shiues saatmestin doactat otmansaneneannenian 327 OT E a N eee en 327 Batch Files Troubleshooting Script and Batch Files ccccccssseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 329 General Problems Timing Problems Example Data Communications Script File cccccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 330 FPx mple Modemi Soript TNS ce tats cc eessciccrcacescstesiceeasicaw acescsucisteassiscw sapicsiesieseeasitaw acecssachensssawseucseceneeanean EEF Backup Restore OVC By 1G W nssmecnninnei n a EAA 333 Cross Reference Tables for CPro 2000 Backup Restore Commands Backup Restore Commands for FiberReach with TL1 Backup Restore Commands for FiberReach with MML cece 339 Backup Restore Commands for DDM OC 3 with TL1 eeeeeeeeeereeees 344 Backup Restore Commands for DDM OC 3
89. 000 prior to obtaining a report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Equipment A report similar to the following appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu e 119 Network Element Equipment Report tmprep tmp CP Pro z000 al Eqmipnent Heport for FT6 2 FT 2000 0C 45 Bao March 19 1999 18 17 CLEISSNETEECAAA ECLT 673242 5LN 95MV011L04d562 i trmtr li TYPE TRMTR APP 39R2 ool S1 2 CLEIT SNRTEECASR ECLTS 201795 5LN 96Mvo44 21515 rovr le TYPE RCVR APP 839Re2 ool S1 1 CLEIT SHRTNNLASA ECIT 6e1776 S5LN 92NV11103s3s13 RYe 2 9S Hs 19 E rowr lw TYPE RCVER APP ss9Re pool S1 1 CLEL SNRTNNLASSA ECI 681776 S5LN 92NV14101140 ls la TYPE OC3 APP LAALOB pooH S1 1 CLET SHCCACABRASA ECLTS237544 SLN 958M loads el lLe lb TYPE 0OC3 APP LAALOB ool S1 1 CLET SHCCACABRASA ECLTS237544 SLN 958M 1064s 766 le Sa TYPE DS3 APP LAs2 ooll S4 4 4 F The circuit pack Hardware ID LAA10B is listed in this sample Report Protection State Purpose To view a report that shows the non preemptible protection access NPPA protection switching state for the current node Note that the protection state report is only available from an FT 2000 OC 48 Network Element View As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the
90. 06 7 313 315 325 Password Aging 36 Path report 111 Physical connections 23 Print Window 58 59 62 69 76 Printing reports and windows 58 Providers Tab 299 Provision Menu 24 52 134 136 161 174 175 76 214 218 240 264 303 Provisioning 5 6 22 37 329 R Range of VT1 5 cross connections 124 159 Range of VT1 5 Drop and Continue cross connections 143 Redline On 125 138 140 145 148 149 151 52 155 Rename Partition 26 63 91 101 2 Report Menu 46 52 103 105 109 303 Report viewer 52 58 63 64 77 103 105 7 109 10 Restore 41 62 91 99 289 333 334 77 379 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Ring transport service 25 203 205 7 214 Roll an existing STS 3 or STS 1 cross connection 125 156 Run Batch Commands 62 69 87 319 S Save Subnetwork 41 62 69 74 75 Save Subnetwork As 62 69 75 Script file 16 28 31 35 36 57 71 88 319 322 325 30 332 Selecting communications options 28 30 31 34 56 Set Access 32 33 41 81 83 85 87 Set CID Secu 24 64 161 179 Set Date 64 161 169 307 313 Set Feat 64 161 180 Set LAN 161 186 Set NE 64 161 307 313 316 Set NPPA 64 161 178 Set Security 161 188 313 Show X Conn 63 1034 SLC 2000 5 7 47 56 387 Status Bar 39 41 49 52 57 63 65 103 4 123 285 STS 1 cross connections 53 104 125 STS 1 One way end to end path 234 STS 1 Two way end to end path 231 STS 3 cross connections 104 318
91. 1346 Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 1 1 Protected OC 3 Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 139 140 e Cross Connections NOTE The following screens illustrate the process for establishing an STS 3 one way 1 1 protected OC 3 cross connection for slot pair 2a 2b Whichever pair of slots you use must be provisioned to be OC 3 1 1 protected through the Provisioning menu before creating this type of cross connection Cross Connection Properties NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter 2 You can click Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the oneway cross connection icon from the toolbar single arrow If available you can also select Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists Click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway From lz 2b To sts3 1w 6 Destinat
92. 2 Release 7 x and FiberReach Releases 3 0 3 1 and 4 0 commands that cause a reset and or result in the loss of DCC connectivity are displayed in a separate Notepad window and must be manually entered in the AUI to complete the restore process These commands are listed in the table below DDM 2000 MML DDM 2000 TL1 FT 2000 TL1 Instructions for manually entering these commands are included in the section that follows CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu e 95 Procedure 1 After choosing Restore from the Edit pull down menu the following screen appears Select File for Restore of Network Element ocl2 brm n h test brm EJ progra 1 Ey cprorl1 0 Backup Files brm 2 Select the appropriate file with which to restore the current NE Click OK NOTE For restoring Network Elements CPro 2000 R11 0 allows the following choices in the message window Confirm restore You have elected to RESTORE this network element Due to the extensive number of commands that must be executed to complete this request it wall typically take from 5 to 15 minutes to complete this command If all threshold values are restored for FT MNEs it may take up to 90 minutes Do you want to continue Restore Options f full restore restore without threshold values restore only thresholds e Select full restore for CPro 2000 R11 0 to completely restore the backed up file e Select restore w
93. 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 PING TID St ECAC A spr a E E 169 Provisioning Set NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 GING Te IID TN SAC ea ee tmanennserancs so sonar saceanmactesacemsktusaesautithcuecaca E E 169 Provisioning Update NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OAS and FS each secre nase athasiraconen saciooien sem oauesse dat amoceannaeuaaesonee 172 Provisioning OSI Parameters DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach cn sna sacnnosssesusoesconatondaSsorinedesnnciiayosssundebslsrdiaddetonscoasaodnndinanddesskamdeosesanaes 172 Provisioning OC 3 Line Options For FT 2000 OC 48 Only ccccccccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeees 174 The FT 2000 Provision Menu c sssseeeeeeeececcceeeeeeeeeaauseeseeeeeeececeeeeeseseuaaaaaseeees 174 Provisioning OC 48 Line Options FT 2000 OC 48 sssessesessssesennennnnsesesesesesessseesseseeseene 176 Provisioning LS Port Options FT 2000 OC 48 0 cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 177 Provisioning Set NPPA Options FT 2000 OC 48 eeeeeseessenneeeesssssesssssesssesessseeeneneneeenenene 178 Provisioning Set CID Secu Options FT 2000 OC 48 ooo ccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 179 Provisioning Set Feat Options DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 OC 12 ee 180 Provisioning DS1 Ports DDM 2000 OC 3 cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeess 181 Provisioning NCT 2 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3
94. 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Help Menu e 303 CPro 2000 Help Purpose To provide an on line version of the User Manual Procedure 1 From the Help pull down menu select CPro 2000 Help A help window displays a sublevel of topics Select the underlined topic for which you need help information NOTE Also included in the help window are standard Microsoft Windows help tools such as File Edit Bookmark Help Contents Search Back and History See your Microsoft Windows documentation for a detailed explanation of these standard features A glossary of terms is also available from the help window About CPro 2000 Purpose To display the version number and NE applicability of CPro 2000 Procedure 1 From the Help menu select About CPro 2000 A banner appears containing the title version number and NEs supported in the current release 304 e The Help Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Command Set Purpose The purpose of this section 1s to provide a cross reference between the Commands and Reports section of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 Commands Cross Reference Table DDM 2000 OC 3 commands reports that do not have an entry in the CPro 2000 Menu column are not supported in CPro 2000 However please keep in mind that since CPro 2000 allows concurrent access to both the GUI
95. 4 STS 3s In the left box each of the 48 e The User Interfaces CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 12 boxes in the three columns from left to right represent STS 1s The last column the fourth column from the left represents the STS 3s The two boxes are mirror images of each other Therefore in the right box the STS 1s occupy the first three columns from right to left The STS 1s are sequentially numbered from the bottom row up In the left box the numbering starts from the bottom left row m 1 across to the first box in the third column of the bottom row m 3 The fourth column represents STS 3s The numbering then continues from the first column in the second row m 4 and across the other two rows m 5 and m 6 and so on STS Is in the right box are similarly numbered but in this case the numbering starts from the bottom box in the right column and goes from right to left Here again the fourth column represents the STS 3s The address of the four STS 3 s in the fourth column correspond to that of the STS 1s in the first column Therefore the address of the first STS 3 bottom right is m 1 Similarly the fourth STS 3 top right is m 4 To check the address of a box hold the cursor over the desired box The address appears in the status bar Boxes below the Green Line The vertically stacked boxes below the green line are placeholders for STS 1s that have been selected and dragged down from their position above the lin
96. 62 69 78 80 306 311 315 LS port options 177 M Map report 115 MegaStar 7 347 377 Menu bar 1 43 52 56 57 61 109 203 287 MML interface 32 Modem 6 23 29 30 32 34 56 57 66 291 93 301 332 Modify LocA LocZ 65 284 Mouse conventions 2 Multiple document interface MDI 40 54 385 N Network element NE 1 386 390 e Index Network element view 17 25 35 39 41 43 46 47 52 53 58 59 62 65 70 77 78 80 89 91 101 103 5 109 112 115 123 26 128 29 131 40 142 48 149 53 157 193 94 283 New Features 7 161 186 New Subnetwork 28 31 32 35 36 41 61 69 70 73 81 171 Node manager 26 27 32 33 35 41 52 62 69 78 84 86 94 O Object Linking and Embedding OLE 386 OC 1 line options 185 OC 12 line options 162 OC 3 line options 164 174 Open NE 62 69 89 Open Partition 62 69 88 Open Subnetwork 31 32 35 36 41 61 69 72 86 Operational Issues 5 6 22 37 329 Optical line interface unit OLIU 43 44 OSI parameters 172 P Packet assembler disassembler PAD 23 387 Pager 6 66 67 287 288 290 92 293 301 Pager Test Tab 67 300 Partition inventory 25 27 31 32 35 36 41 42 46 56 62 70 71 73 78 111 113 195 204 Partition map 25 27 31 32 35 36 41 62 70 71 73 78 82 Partitioning 5 6 22 24 31 33 35 36 37 40 70 195 329 Password 7 31 35 36 37 63 70 71 77 80 82 84 86 87 91 100 171 190 3
97. Access Edit View Report Provision Update Window XConns Alarms Help _ romam 0017 00120 elele Ld rural i Enter an STS 3 Two way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Subnetwork View select the End to End Path pull down menu or click the right mouse button and select End to End from the pop up menu and then select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS3 signal rate and 2WAY path type 222 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the first add drop node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 223 sts3 le 4 sts3 le 7 sts3 1e 9 sts3 1e 10 sts3 1le 15 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Add Drop Node 1
98. Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 aaa ieee oes ne eee jk Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd 7 7 a CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Cmd Parameter l4tlif 14tltm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajorg l4ajres l4ajrd l4ajarea l4ajsys l4etdc l4tdctid l4tdcorg l4tdcres l4tdcrd l4tdcarea Special Conditions l4tdcsys 14tdcsel input_msg output msg oper _e oper _w tgl clk sts tg2 clk sts syncnmod STC pds1_iof sdsl_iof pds1_ilc sds1 ilc ds11_equ ds12 equ Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 371 9o jk KK KM KK KK KK KM KM MK KK MK MM KKK KKK KM KK KK OM KO OO KO O KK RK mK KK KK KK S S ad mk KK KM KK KK KK KM KM MK KK KM KM KKK KK KK KM KK KK OM Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 continued QO p Ke d oo l ee oo l e ssa ae Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions almdel clrdel Alarm set attr alm rtrv attr alm tribrep Alarm set attr env rtrv attr env ntfcncde almmsg Alarm set attr cont rtrv attr cont conttype Alarm Li rtrv attr all aidtype speccond 640 locn always nend Alarm set attr t3 dirn always rcv ntfcncde Alarm set attr oc3 Alarm set attr ec X conn ent crs sts 1 rtrv crs sts 1 cct loca locz extra oc3st pst sst audit
99. CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Glossary of Terms e 387 Target Identifier A target identifier TID allows an NE to be addressed TCP IP A networking protocol used to provide communications between networks TID See Target Identifier TL1 See Transaction Language One Transaction Language One A syntax used in OS NE communications VT1 5 A SONET virtual tributary logical signal with a bit rate of 1 728 Mbps capable of DS1 payload X 25 port The DTE to DCE interface between a synchronous host and a packet switched data network 388 e Glossary of Terms CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Index 2 24G 47 51 54 29G 52 124 207 214 218 19 264 347 355 A Access Menu 19 20 22 26 28 31 33 35 36 41 52 58 59 69 81 86 171 190 288 89 293 303 Active User 193 94 Advanced Tab 22 Alarm Preferences 291 94 296 298 301 Alarm status 25 41 52 63 65 66 104 194 288 90 Alarm Tab 66 292 96 298 300 Alarms 7 25 42 63 65 67 65 70 109 287 96 288 91 292 96 298 300 298 300 303 306 312 317 Arrange Icons 65 197 201 ASCII User Interface AUD 5 54 383 Audible Alarms 7 287 289 90 Audit On 125 138 140 145 148 49 151 52 155 231 235 285 AUI toolbar 56 Auto alarm polling 65 66 287 288 89 291 92 B Backup 15 41 52 62 91 95 97 289 333 334 79 Backup amp Restore 5 6 22 37 329 Bandwidth Usage report 46 114 Batc
100. CS 2 DDM 2000 OC 3 R15 1 August 29 2000 ci 11 39 Backup Result Mo backup commands failed to execute CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu e 93 Restore 94 e The Edit Menu 6 Click OK Your backup file is now created A typical backup file contains information similar to the following NOTE The content of a backup file varies with the type and release of NE and its equipage This following is just a sample of what a backup file may contain e The first line of a backup file contains information about the NE The format is the following internal ID for NE type ring 1 or linear 0 release number TID of NE at time of backup user ID of user who created file date of file creation as per the NE time of file creation as per the NE A sample first line might look like the following 1 1 7 2 NODE AA LUCO1 1 4 70 21 6 32 e The remainder of the backup file consists of lines containing a Data ID and associated data fields all separated by a comma The following is an example CMD RTRV SECU cit 1 disabled 0 The number of fields and their values vary depending on the command CAUTION It is strongly recommended that you do not try to access or modify your backup files CPro 2000 cannot support backup files that have been manipulated in any way NOTE For a DDM 2000 provisionable parameters can be backed up from one node and restored to a different n
101. Change LocA LocZ feature In addition CPro 2000 allows the source of an existing STS 3 or STS 1 cross connection to be moved or rolled to another source without interruption in service For more information regarding these features see the Change LocA and LocZ Values for an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection and Roll an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection to a New Source sections in this chapter Audit On and Redline On Options FT 2000 only As you create a cross connection the Cross Connection Properties box appears with the Audit On and Redline On options When Audit On is chosen the alarm feature that notifies the user of any signal problem is activated When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification to it until it is untagged To change either setting double click on the cross connection in the NE view to display the Change Loca amp Locz dialog box Either feature can be toggled on off by clicking on its box to insert remove the check mark prior to clicking on OK Deleting Cross Connections To delete a cross connection using the drag and drop technology simply select the cross connection line you wish to delete by clicking on it the X cursor appears and drag the cross connection to the trash can icon appearing at the bottom of the Network Element View You may also click on the cross connection line to select it and then press Dele
102. D of the initial login node from the down arrow list 3 For all NE types enter your user ID and press the Tab key Enter your password 4 Ifyou want to use a script other than the default click the Browse button to display the Select a Script File dialog box The following screen appears ddm scr gg cs default scr EJ progra 1 E cprori 11 0 ft scr modem scr 5 Navigate to the CPro 2000 installation directory to access the Script Files If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 1 cpror11 0 6 Select one of the existing data communications scripts depending on your application Click OK to select the script NOTE Although certain default script files are provided with the CPro 2000 software you can also create scripts see Appendix D Script and Batch Files for information on writing script files Settings should be the same in both the CPRO INI File and the script file being used Any new script files should be thoroughly tested 7 The Login dialog box redisplays with the selected script file Click OK 8 Ifyou selected Partition Map or Partition Inventory from the Login window CPro 2000 automatically attempts to logs into each of the NEs in the subnetwork The following window appears during CPro 2000 s the first login attempt into one of the NEs in the subnetwork Type in the correct user ID and password and then click OK TID SHC OCS UserID Passwor
103. DDM 2000 OC 3 ring can be the child ring so the Ring Transport Service path is being created in the DDM 2000 OC 12 ring e A low speed slot in the add drop nodes of the parent ring must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack e The OC 3 line application parameter must be set to 0x1 for all nodes in the parent ring This is set in the Provision Menu Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS1 signal rate and Twoway Ring Transport 214 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 SNC O03 E SN C OC3 F 2 Near the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose an add drop node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 215 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected 5 You are prompted to select the next add drop node D
104. EPRPT NOTE The PDIPSW parameter dictates system reaction to a payload defect If PDIPSW is disabled no switching occurs in the event of a payload defect If PDISW is enabled switching occurs with a minor alarm when a payload defect is detected The EQPDEPRPT parameter value displayed in the DS3 Port Provisioning dialog box corresponds to the value selected FT 2000 OC 48 NE Options dialog box Refer to Provisioning Set NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach for more information 2 Choose a port address or AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address or AID box A list of all EC 1 port addresses or AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a port address or AID is chosen click Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address or AID is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters 168 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 4 To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning Set Date Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000
105. ET ATTR ENV Set Attribute Environment SET SID SWITCH TOPROTN SWITCH TOWKG UPDATE SYS CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commandse 317 FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures Purpose The purpose of this section is to provide a cross reference between the TOPs section of the Lucent Technologies FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported in CPro 2000 The following table provides a cross reference between the CPro 2000 capabilities and the FT 2000 OC 48 TOPs Not every step in every one of the identified TOPs may be supported in CPro 2000 The following table only means that significant steps of the TOPs identified in the following table will be helped by the use of CPro 2000 Wherever the TOP calls for use of a particular TL1 command that is not supported in the CPro 2000 menu it is assumed that the user will enter such commands directly from the AUI window TOP Number Supported by Description CPro 2000 Circuit Order Operation NTP 003 Establish Dual Ring Interworking DRI Connections NTP 004 Disconnect Dual Ring Interworking DRI Connections Detailed Level DLP 517 Provision Low Speed Slot and Port Parameters DLP 522 Change a User s Login DLP 536 Enter Delete Edit STS 3 Cross Connections at Network Element for 2 Fiber Ring Network 318 eAppendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands CPro 2000 Use
106. F6 3 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example for a one way STS 3 DRI cross connection NOTE The primary cross connection is shown with a solid black line and the secondary cross connection is shown with a dashed line 146 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The following example represents a one way STS 1 DRI cross connection created by using the same procedure described earlier for a one way STS 3 DRI cross connection l F6 4 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 0 Enter Two way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The cross connection must be established in the Add direction In other words the source must be a low speed slot and the destination must be a tributary The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties O s 2a 2 gt ste1 lw 6 2 EC sncercr I CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 147 NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem
107. FOR OC3 Option Parameters YTPH B E 0 Curent vValue kd DS1PH Enter SET FEAT FOR OC12 Option Parameters Current Yalue oa Click Get Value to see the current settings To update the value use the down arrow list and select the appropriate value Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Provisioning DS1 Ports DDM 2000 OC 3 Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select DS1 Ports The following dialog box displays wt Provisioning Enter 051 Option Parameters Port Address PH Hode Formal 2 Choose a port address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address box A list of all DSI port addresses for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a port address is chosen click Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 181 182 e The Provision Menu For a DS1 circuit pack the following screen appears Enter 251 Option Parameters Port Addres Line Coding Alarm Level Failure Threshold BPY to LOS State PH Hode F
108. For an explanation of these options see the Customizing CPro 2000 Setting sections of this chapter 5 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the CPro ini dialog box or click Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected iii The Transparency Tab CPro 2000 is version specific in terms of the NE releases it supports The transparency feature allows CPro 2000 to operate against NE features for which it was not specifically designed Typing the release number of the compatible NE in the Base Release field and the number for the incompatible NE in the New Release field enables CPro 2000 to communicate with the incompatible NE exactly as it would the compatible NE NOTE Do not use this tab without consulting Customer Technical Support To get technical support for CPro 2000 call 1 800 225 4672 Lucent Technologies toll free hotline number The hotline is staffed with technical representatives and is operational 24 hours a day seven days a week To connect to an NE version that is unsupported by the current CPro 2000 release 1 From the GUI click the Access menu then select Edit CPro ini The CPro ini Preferences dialog box appears with the Interface Settings tab displayed 2 Click the Transparency tab 20 e Installation CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 3 CPro int Preferences Interface Settings Com Port Defaults Tra
109. KK KK et p a PA ee Se E Ie R RE E Un Aa a a Sync ent syncn rtrv syncn syncnmode src main or main2 l4ajsys syncfunction Swith frtvsynen provisioned mode Comm set fecom rtrv fecom communications Local restoration only side en aisthres mdsw Alarm ent attr alm rtrv attr alm almdel clrdel pmn 346 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Alarm ent attr env rtrv attr env ntfcnde RT only almmsg almtype Alarm ent attr cont rtrv attr cont conttype RT only Port amp Line ent lan rtrv lan erpid aal5 vpi vci frm Igth scrambler polynom fes almlvl pmmd Port amp Line ent nct rtrv nct ctsenabled cts tcts mode Port amp Line ent oc3 rtrv oc3 syncmsg aisnc sfthr not applicable OC 3 concat MegaStar only radio application dccmode Port amp Line ent oc12 rtrv oc12 syncmsg Only if equipped with aisnc 24G or 29G OLIU sfthr dccmode Port amp Line ent t rtrv tl linecde HW with override ntfcncde bpv ais sfthr pmmd fmt only DS1 PM CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 347 KO KOKKA Kx s AOKO OKOK AJK a ad PETRS RSE oo B ee E Nn nnana Gene ene i a Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued Area Rest
110. Kaane P PEO e e E A A E ta cesteecsuccharaestescorseees 101 The View Menu 103 Ba a e EEE A E E A N A I EEE E A A E AA 103 ESNEA E EEEE EEE E E A O P E A TE A ES AON E ENE EE 104 IO OUD AT e E EE EA 104 ON ON a r E E acsmntaesaauececasseedsateioncornseentontaneeaneesceetzerns 104 PES 52 O e E E E A E 105 UTI yO MS N a r 105 a a o E E E A E S E A E ase naaesqecoaiganeates 105 The Report Menu 109 OVE IE N ee E E E E E E ee ee rare 109 Keport Screen Pune NODS ene en ae ea Ea ea a eiaa a ree 110 Pal E A E A A 111 ROS SS OMS O a E E ones 112 Tne ra Ua iE une e a E re E E A O E 113 Pand wa eh 0 pen E E E a 114 IVA AD EE TE P EEEE EE TE E E EEEE EE E E E T E TETE E E 115 AL E E iid antaeeevardsaesvarseataunrsiactoveaness 117 DVIS O09 E E EAE E EE E E E E T A E T 118 P 0 00 cs 0 ae ee ee ee eee ee ee eee 119 PPO CSC HOT UG eenn a o a rE NE 120 Port SOU OOS niasin n diac bob odiceuadiacadndseetecnned tie dh bes nde stat bansadasemntdentod adie ieee 121 Cross Connections 123 O a E E EE 123 Creating Cross Connections cccccesessseeessssssssssesssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssessaeseaaaaaas 123 Deleting Cross Connections cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 125 Entering Cross Connections c cccccccssssssssesesssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssesssssseesseessaessasaasaassaaaaaaaas 125 Enter Two way STS 1 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter Two way VT1 5 Cross Connection DDM 200
111. LM SER Test Telemetry Serial oo _TEST TRMSN T3 Test Transmission T3 Z oo o TOGGLE Ct T Toggle CT o UD oo Update o o o CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands e 313 DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures Purpose The purpose of this section is to provide a cross reference between the TOPs section of the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported in CPro 2000 The following table provides a cross reference between the CPro 2000 capabilities and the DDM 2000 OC 12 TOPs Not every step in every one of the identified TOPs may be supported in CPro 2000 The following table only means that significant steps of the TOPs identified in the following table will be helped by the use of CPro 2000 Wherever the TOP calls for use of a particular CIT command that is not supported in the CPro 2000 menu it is assumed that the user will enter such commands directly from the AUI window TOP Number Supported by Description CPro 2000 NTP 004 Establish Initial End to End DS3 Service Group Equipped But Not In Service NTP 005 Add New DS3 Group for DS3 Service System In Service NTP 021 Add New DDM 2000 OC 12 Node Shelf To DDM 2000 eure OC 12 Path Switched Ring NTP 022 Discontinue DDM 2000 OC 12 Node Shelf From DDM 2000 ae OC 12 Path Switched Ring Network Establish Initial EC 1 Ser
112. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations CPro 2000 User Manual 365 576 171 Release 11 0 September 2000 Copyright 2000 Lucent Technologies All Rights Reserved Printed in U S A Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However this information is subject to change Lucent Technologies assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document Trademarks Datakit and SLC 2000 are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Inc MultiTech is a registered trademark of MultiTech Systems Trailblazer is a registered trademark of ITK Telecommunications Inc Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks and Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Workgroups Windows NT and Microsoft Paint are trademarks of Microsoft Corp VT 100 is a trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Ordering Information The ordering number for the CPro 2000 User Manual only is 365 576 170 To order this or any other Lucent Technologies document and software call your Lucent Technologies account representative or contact the Customer Information Center CIC at 1 888 LUCENTS8 Customer Assistance or Technical Support You may call the Lucent Technologies Regional Technical Assistance Center RTAC at 1 800 225 RTAC or the Lucent Technologies toll free hotline at 1 800 225 4672 for customer assi
113. Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu e 121 Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Port Slot Options The Port Slot Options pull down menu displays This menu contains different options depending on the current node s NE type as shown in the list below e DDM 2000 OC 3 DS1 DS3 EC1 NCT 2 OC1 OC 3 OC 12 e DDM 2000 OC 12 DS3 EC1 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 e FiberReach DS1 T1 OC1 and OC3 e FT 2000 OC 48 DS3 EC1 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 LS 2 Select the appropriate port option A report similar to the following appears ol C1 R 1 Report 3 tmprep tmp gt SS x EPEo 2000 GET FPeport Cor SITELNE1L LLM 2000 Wes R13 0 Se eee oo March 22 1999 11 56 seese _ 7 OC 1l Line Frowisioning Report Bee Siqnal Deqrade AIS Address Threshold Alarm e eee ee ee ne ae 122 e The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections Overview CPro 2000 provides the ability to create cross connections from the Network Element View using the drag and drop technology This chapter contains instructions for creating and deleting individual or ranges of cross connections Creating Cross Connections Drag and drop cross connection creation consists of selecting an available address for a cross connection observing an X cursor indicating that you are currently in cross connection mode and dragging the X cursor to the destination address of the cross connection Ind
114. NSW SWFBR Release Protection Switch on Switch i Fabric RLS SYNCSW Release Synchronization Switch La RTRV AO Retrieve Autonomous Output ns RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarm and Status Conditions RTRV ALM ENV_ Retrieve Alarm Environment RTRV ATTR ALM___ Retrieve Attribute Alarm J RTRV ATTR CONT_ Retrieve Attribute Control J RTRVr Retriever S o RTRV ATTR rr_ Retrieve Attribute Jo o o RTRV CKT rr Retrieve Cireuitrr Jo o oo 316 eAppendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 TL1 Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item RTRV COND Update Alarms RTRV CRS STS3 Retrieve Cross Connection STS 3 Update Cross Connections RTRV EQPT Retrieve Equipment Update Network Element Inventory RTRV HDR Retrieve Header RTRV MAP RTRV MAP NEIGHBOR RTRV MAP NETWORK RTRV MAP RING Retrieve Map Ring Update SubNetwork Map RTRV PM Retrieve Performance Monitoring Reports PM Data RTRV PROT rr Retrieve Protectionrr Jo ooo RTRV PROTN LINE Retrieve Protection Line J RTRV PROTN LS Retrieve Protection Low Speed RTRV PTHTRC rr Retrieve Path Trace rr RTRV rr Retrieve rr Provision Port Options RTRV SYS Retrieve System RTRV TH Retrieve PM Thresholds o RTRV TMSLT rr Retrieve Timeslotrr o o RTRV ULSDCC Retrieve Upper Layer Section DCC RTRV USER SECU Retrieve User Security Jo ooo SET ATTR rr Set Attributer o o i O Ss SSS l SSS Le SET ATTR ALM SET ATTR CONT S
115. OC 48 and FiberReach Purpose To display and or modify the current date and time of the NE Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set Date The following dialog box displays 2 Click Get Value to see the current settings 3 To modify the settings type over them with the desired values and click Set Value Provisioning Set NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach Purpose To set options for the current NE depending on the NE type Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set NE One of the following screens appears depending on the NE type A screen similar to the following appears for DDM 2000 OC 3 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 169 DDM 2000 OC 3 NE Options TID Anetta Alen Grou AGHE NOTE Alarm Group and AGNE are only available when RneStat is set to enabled A screen similar to the following appears for FiberReach DDM 2000 FiberReach NE Options TIE FRI Rnetta Current alue Alor Grou NOTE Alarm Group and AGNE are only available when RneStat is set to enabled CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 170 e The Provision Menu A screen similar to the following appears for DDM 2000 OC 12 DDM 2000 OC 12 NE Options a Current Yalue bd A screen similar to the following appears for FT 2000 ee eee DR TSAGRAH EGPDEPRP NOTE For FT 2000 you use the EQPDEPRPT
116. Planners Craft Personnel and Maintenance Personnel Engineering planners craft personnel and maintenance personnel typically use an ASCII terminal that is directly connected to the CIT port or X 25 port also known as the operation system interface OSI port of a SONET NE through an RS 232 cable to perform analysis of the subnetwork Now the engineer can use a desktop or laptop personal computer PC running Microsoft Windows 95b Windows 98 Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4 0 to access CPro 2000 The appropriate communications COM port of the PC running CPro 2000 is connected to the NE s CIT port to operate and analyze the SONET subnetwork CPro 2000 provides the following benefits to engineering planners craft personnel and maintenance personnel e subnetwork view via connection to any NE in the subnetwork e simplification of most SONET NE commands through the use of a graphical user interface GUI CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 About This Manual e 1 Centralized Work Center Personnel Work center personnel typically use operations systems OSs to access the various components of the network including the NEs to analyze provision and test the network and to dispatch the outside plant engineer for any necessary on site repairs to the NEs In this case CPro 2000 can serve as a mini OS by utilizing the remote capability of the ASCII user interfaces AUIs of all Lucent Technologies SONET NEs Conventions Us
117. Pro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The following is an example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is a FiberReach with 26G2 U OLIU circuit pack in the main tributaries The following is an example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node is a FiberReach with 28G U OLIU OC 3 circuit pack in the main tributaries and 22 type circuit pack in the function slots ai ae SNC WBS D DDM 2000 FiberReach A3 12 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 45 The following is an example of the CPro 2000 GUI when the local node 1s an FT 2000 OC 48 BE F6 1 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 1 OXI a i qe The Subnetwork View The CPro 2000 GUI contains a Subnetwork View representing the subnetwork topology of the NEs also known as nodes The Subnetwork View displays any discovered partitions in the subnetwork and the connectivity between them The partition icons can be expanded by clicking on them An expanded partition shows the individual NEs in the partition A Network Element View can be opened by double clicking on the box representing the individual NE in an expanded partition Subnetwork level tasks such as retrieving path reports and bandwidth usage obtaining the Partition Inventory and creating deleting end to end paths can be executed from the Subnetwork View NOTE For details on how to display the Bandwidth Usage report see The Report Menu chapter 46 e The User Interfaces CPro 2000 User Ma
118. Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter To change either setting double click on the cross connection in the NE view to display the Change Loca amp Locz dialog box Either feature can be toggled on off from here by clicking on its box to insert remove the check mark prior to clicking on OK 4 Depending on the cross connection type the dialog box displays one of the following e Fora drop cross connection meaning that the cross connection s source AID is in a tributary and the destination AID is in a slot the dialog box appears prompting changes to LocA The down arrow list for Select New Destination is grayed out and not selectable e For an add cross connection meaning that the cross connection s source AID is in a slot and the destination AID is in a tributary the dialog box appears prompting changes to LocZ The down arrow list for Select New Source is grayed out and not selectable e Fora pass through or DRI cross connection meaning that both the source and destination AIDs are in tributaries the dialog box appears prompting changes CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 155 to LocA and or LocZ Both Select New Source and Select New Destination are available to make changes 5 Enter the new LocA and or LocZ value and click OK At any
119. S PROG Install Progam oo o OPR ACO Operate Alarm Cutoff ooo CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands e 311 OC 12 CIT Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item OPR LPBK T3 Operate Loopback T3 RESET iT Reset RLS LPBK EC1 Release Loopback ECI o RLS LPBK T3 Release Loopback T3 RTRV ATTR ALM___ Retrieve Attribute Alarm o o RTRV ATTR CONT_ Retrieve Attribute Control RTRV ATTR ENV_ Retrieve Attribute Environment RTRV CRS STS1 Retrieve Cross Connection STS 1 Update Cross Connections RTRV EC1 Retrieve EC 1 Provision EC1 RTRV EQPT Retrieve Equipment Update Network Element Inventory RTRV FEAT Retrieve Feature RTRV FECOM Retrieve Far End Communications RTRV HSTY RTRV LGN Retrieve Login oo o RTRV LINK Retrieve Link ooo o RTRV NE Retrieve Network Element Update Network Element Inventor RTRV NMAP Retrieve Network Map RTRV OC12 Retrieve OC 12 Provision OC 12 RTRV OC3 Retrieve OC 3 Provision OC 3 RTRV PM LINE Retrieve Performance Monitoring Line RTRV PM SECT Retrieve Performance Monitoring Section RTRV PM STS1 Retrieve Performance Monitoring STS 1 Reports PM Data STSI1PM RTRV PM T3 Retrieve Performance Monitoring T3 Reports PM RTRV PM TCA RTRV PMTHRES LINE Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold Section Threshold STS 1 RTRV PMTHRES T3 Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold T3 RTRV SECU RTRV STATE RTRV STATE
120. STS3 Enter Cross Connection STS 3 X Conn Network Element Enter CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commandse 315 _ENT PROT rr sf Enter Protectionrr o o o _ENT PROTN LINE_ Enter Protection Line _ENT PROTN LS_ Enter Protection Low Speed _ENT ROLL STS3 Enter Roll STS 3_ ENT r Ete o o Provision Port Options ENT STS1 Enter STS 1 ENT SYS Enter System Edit Change TID aa Ue sc Ce ENT ULSDCC Enter Upper Layer Section DCC ENT USER SECU_ Enter User Security O Jooo INH MSG_ Inhibit Message o Ooo INIT REG Initialize Register __ Jooo INIT SYS Initialize System OPR ACO Operate Alarm Cutoff J o S _OPR EXT CONT Operate External Control OPR LPBK ECI Operate Loopback ECI Jo o ooo OPR LPBK OC3 Operate Loopback OC 3 _ Jooo OPR LPBK T3 Operate Loopback T3 Jooo OPR PROTNSW OC12__ Operate Protection Switch OC 12_ __ OPR PROTNSW OC3 Operate Protection Switch OC 3 OPR PROTNSW OC48 Operate Protection Switch OC 48 OPR PROTNSW SWFBR Operate Protection Switch on Switch rl Fabric OPR SYNCSW Operate Synchronization Switch RLS EXT CONT Release External Control RLS LPBK EC1 Release Loopback ECI RLS LPBK OC3 Release Loopback OC 3 _ RLS LPBK T3 Release Loopback T3 RLS PROTNSW OC12 Release Protection Switch OC 12 RLS PROTNSW OC3 Release Protection SwitchOC 3 RLS PROTNSW OC48 Release Protection Switch OC 48 RLS PROT
121. Source Aid s 1a Destination Aid sts3 1e 1 0NEWAT LOC7 FB TID F6 1 Source Aid sts3 1w 1 Destination Aid is 1a ONE WaT _LOCA F6 Click the path name to be red lined The path name is highlighted Click Close if you want to end this operation without making any changes To red line the path place a check mark in the box next to Red Line by clicking in the box Next click Modify Path and the following screen appears Tag Red Line Fa Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue Click No if you do not want to red line the selected end to end path and the operation is ended Click Yes if you want to red line the selected end to end path The following screen appears Tag Red Line x ce Modification to Red Line Service for this End To End Path ts successfully completed NOTE An end to end path can be untagged Redline status removed by clicking on Modify Path when the Red Line box is unchecked 286 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Alarms Menu Overview The Alarms menu allows you to activate the auto alarm polling feature set parameters for the audible alarms and pager test the pager set up and set other network monitoring preferences Specific activities that you can perform with this feature include enabling disabling or silencing the audible alarm and configuring the audible alarm and pager You can access the alarm menu options from the GUI
122. TRV xx ALL can be used to retrieve a variety of parameters These parameters can then be restored with the appropriate modifier that follows There will not be a corresponding restore command for RTRV xx ALL That is why the restore command column is blank For CPro the use of the RTRV xx ALL command is optional If RTRV xx ALL is not used the parameters can be retrieved using the RTRV xx modifier commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 379 380 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases Table of NE releases per CPro releases CPro Release R6 1 2 R7 0 R8 0 R10 0 R11 0 amp R6 2 EiperReach ff a E S N a a a e CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro release e 381 Table of NE releases per CPro releases continued CPro Release R6 1 R6 1 2 R7 0 R8 0 R10 0 R11 0 a 382 eAppendix F Table of NE releases per CPro release CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Glossary of Terms AID Access Identifier FT 2000 Also applies to Equipment Address DDM 2000 American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard established by American National Standards Institute ANSI that represents characters numbers punctuation marks or signals and uses seven on off bits plus a parity bit to achieve compatibility among data service
123. ackets around optional command groups and the correct use of the TRANSMITT command For a DDM 2000 if certain commands being sent with the transmitt command end with a semicolon they should not be followed by a carriage return r However this is not true for all DDM 2000 commands or for any FT 2000 commands Timing Problems The most difficult aspect of creating a script or batch file is to ensure that there are appropriate PAUSE and WAITFOR commands in the file as described in the following paragraphs The best way to verify that the timing is effective is to set up the file and test it Continue to test and make modifications to the timing until the file is correctly established CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Filese 329 Command Output If a user is sending a command to an NE and wants to see the NE s response to the command in the AUI a WAITFOR command must follow the TRANSMITT command in the script or batch file Typically for an FT 2000 OC 48 NE the WAITFOR statement contains a semicolon and for a DDM 2000 the WAITFOR statement contains a greater than sign gt The semicolon and gt are the prompts used by an NE to indicate that it is ready for further user input The Pause Command The pause command used in the format PAUSE can be used to tell CPro 2000 not to send anythine to an NE for a defined period of time The number that follows pause is a quantity of microseconds For
124. address from the source addresses then press the Shift key While still holding down the Shift key click an address at end of the range then release the Shift key Click the corresponding starting address in the destinations box to complete the process The source addresses should be an unbroken group of addresses such as m 1 1 1 m 1 1 2 m 1 1 3 and so on e To create a noncontiguous range of cross connections select the starting address from the source addresses then press the Ctrl key While still holding down the Ctrl key click the desired addresses Selected addresses must be in ascending or descending order for example as m 1 1 1 m 1 1 3 m 1 2 1 or as m 1 2 1 m 1 1 3 m 1 1 1 Click the corresponding starting address in the destinations box to complete the process NOTE CPro 2000 R11 0 does not support the creation of ranges of cross connections contiguous or noncontiguous for DDM 2000 OC 12 or FT 2000 OC 48 For details on allowable cross connections consult the User Manual for the relevant NE Creating Cross Connections on shelves equipped with 29G OLIUs When the main slots of the DDM 2000 OC 3 R15 x shelf or the FiberReach R4 0 shelf are equipped with 29G OLIUs CPro 2000 supports cross connections of full STS 3C STS 1 and VT granularity e STS 3Cs through cross connections are allowable only when created above the green line in the GUI e Only Two Way and Drop and Continue cross connections are allowed
125. ael abcde a caiataeaaceail dcacdiadiaiel Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with TL1 continued Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions 3 1 Channel ent sts 1 rtrv sts 1 sfthr sfail aisncsa aisnc pst lop 22 type OLIU in fn slot rtrv th all see SpecCond 630 KKK KM MILK MK OK OX e KKK e a 5 x KK KM ML ENT FEAT DSlpm enabled See SpecCond 630 modifier SF modifier ESF set th vt ENT FEAT VT1pm enabled See SpecCond 630 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 337 KK KKK KK RK KK KKK KK RK KK KKK KK RK Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with TL1 continued oS mk A KKK K KKK KK RK x KKK KK MK Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 3 0 o slot Equipped with 28G U only KOKO OKO A KK KKK KK RK ananassae Sf n 338 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML Backup Cmd Special Conditions System set ne rtrv ne Security set secu rtrv secu user type X rtrv tll msgmap Rf o ent ulsdcc 13 rtrv ulsdcc 13 ent ulsdcc l4 rtrv ulsdcc l4 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 tid co rt rnestat almegrp agne idle channel signal security timeout porttype echo baudrate acid message type ac
126. al Transmitter Power applies to 21G OLIU only and not other types of OLIU 378 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 SpecCond 590 If the current value of the ENT T1 Line Coding parameter in the target NE is different from the value in the backup file the backup value shall be used and a warning message shall be displayed SpecCond 600 For DDM Nes the switch settable parameters of STSIE pack shall be compared with that on the backup file If they don t agree the restoration shall not proceed SpecCond 610 The following values of the port state parameter are equivalent OOS MA AS in TL1 AUTO in MML OOS in TL1 NMON Gin MML SpecCond 620 Far end communication must be enabled for TL1 messages If the current value and the backup value are different Cpro shall display a warning message and set it enabled SpecCond 630 The DDM convention of representing numbers with scientific notation is that the 1E part of the notation in the retrieved value field has to be dropped for the entry value field That is for the retrieve command the value returned will has the full scientific notation including 1E However when entering the value with the set or ent commands the 1E MUST be dropped Currently CPro is required to observe this convention for the pmthrormance management threshold values SpecCond 640 For FT 2000 network elements the command R
127. al emulation type port settings from an already created file or modifying the default values such as stop and data bits modem settings and connect disconnect See the Accessing the Subnetwork section in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter for further information on how to use these commands The Run Script File Menu enables you to run script files without accessing the CPro 2000 GUI This menu also provides scripts for system and shelf turnups The system and shelf turnup scripts must be ordered directly from Lucent Technologies and can be customized for your location For ordering information please call 1 800 WE2 CARE The Help Menu provides information about the currently running CPro 2000 release TCP IP Connection Options Toolbar from left to right Connect Disconnect and Capture Menu bar from left to right in the toolbar The Network Menu allows you to connect to or disconnect from the NE The Edit Menu allows you to edit the contents of the AUI window using the Clear command to erase all text from the AUI window the Copy command to copy a selection to the clipboard or the Paste command to insert the contents of the clipboard into the AUI or another application The Capture Menu is not available in CPro 2000 Release R11 0 The Help Menu provides information about the currently running CPro 2000 release CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 57 NOTE Any settings found in a login script or a
128. al from one OLIU circuit pack in the mains The signal uses both rotations of the ring but only a portion of the ring is being used for the path Because a locked path uses a set path for the signal the amount of time it takes the signal to go from point A to point B is always the same The following illustration shows a Locked Arc path in a single DDM 2000 OC 3 ring The add drop cross connection at Node A 1s a locked cross connection and the signal is being passed through the circuit pack in slot m2 At Node B there is a two way pass through cross connection At Node C there is another add drop cross connection that is also locked This cross connection takes the signal through the circuit pack in m1 and drops it It also takes incoming signal Locked cross connections use the Ring ID to designate which main slot is to be used to transmit and receive the signal For this path the Ring ID at Node A is m2 and the Ring ID at Node C is ml 244 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter a VI1 5 Locked End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for VT1 5 signal rate and Locked Arc path type Enter End To End Path SHC 0C3 C CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 245 2 Near the bottom of the form in the dia
129. and Rename e Clicking the right mouse button on an NE icon while in the Subnetwork View brings up a pop up menu containing the following commands Open NE View Close Partition Update Map Update Inventory End To End Path and Reports The Toolbar Use the toolbar for quick access to tasks The toolbar icons are shown below although not all of the icons display at the same time The icons that display at any given time depend on which GUI window has the focus The icons from left to right represent the following commands New Subnetwork Open Subnetwork Save Subnetwork Print Backup Network Element Restore Network Element Node Manager Open Subnetwork and Partition Map and Help O coe ea Sy a E ee e e The Status Bar CPro 2000 displays a status bar at the bottom of the GUI screen as shown in the following illustration The status bar is made up of three areas e Alarm Status left section Indicates the most severe alarm present in the current node using the color conventions listed in the following table CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 41 42 e The User Interfaces Color FT 2000 Representation DDM 2000 Representation Red CR critical and MJ major CR critical and MJ major alarms alarms Yellow MN minor alarms MN minor alarms NEA near end activity and ABN abnormal conditions No alarms NA no alarm or FEA far end ee activity condition NA conditio
130. ands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions 8 1 System rtrv sys tid agne address dsne_address tsagran sadd dce tll or cit dte tll or cit baud tll dce baud tll dte ent sys ent sys use value of tid System ent sys rtrv sys nid dsne Kills remote logins if gne changed agne almgrp 0 to 255 x25ps 256 or 128 protocol Security ent ne secu rtrv ne secu alw uid page uout Security rtrv cid secu portstat Not all parameters apply gnetid to dte dce dcc and x25 uid Backup those reported Security ent cid secu rtrv cid secu tmout Only restore backup porttype parameters baudrate chan ostype calladdr CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 369 p lt s gt E gt x o md X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 continued O N mk elaine anes ane h aaa eee aaa ee ee Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions dcc rtrv user secu l m ee Comm ent asgnmt dcc rtrv asgnmt dcc dece chan drops remote links ortn roa Sooo Comm entulsdcc 13 rtrv ulsdcc 3 l3org l3res 3rd I3area 13lv2is Comm emt ulsdee l4 td S Comm rtrv ulsdcc 14 l4tlif 14titm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajnsap 14tdctid l4tdcnsap 370 eAppendix E
131. anel still open click the next node in the ring FR2 B in the above example CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 85 CPro Node Manager Hap Partition Inventory Partition Set Access Rename Close NodeMan UserlD tu coz Password i gpa O O E OF Cancel e Click OK The Node Manager window contracts again and CPro 2000 applies the information in the expanded section to the selected node Repeat the steps from the TIP to preset the ID and password for all the nodes in the ring When you press Map Partition or Inventory Partition later in the session CPro 2000 will use the predefined information to log into each node without prompting for the user ID and password Setting access from a saved subnetwork file 1 Bring up CPro 2000 2 From the Access Menu click Open Subnetwork Select A File for Opening Subnetwork Ei Ei File name Folders test snw a a view snw EJ progra Ey cprorl 1 0 Cancel rit Help List files of type Drives Subnetwork Files snw Sc winds 86 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 3 Navigate to the desired saved file and then click OK The Login window appears UserlB Se ea Password Script ee 4 Enter the UserID and Password and then click OK The unexpanded subnetwork view displays 5 Double click the subnetwork view to expand the display 6 Double click a node to display the NE view
132. ange the port protocol provisioning from a TL1 port to CIT port This command must be completed from an NE in the subnetwork other than the one to which CPro 2000 is connected DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Access via X 25 Port For DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 the X 25 port is always active and once the cable is hooked up communication can be established This provides TL1 commands and responses for all the supported TL1 commands If you are not using a packet switched network then a PAD must be used to connect CPro 2000 directly to an X 25 port FT 2000 OC 48 Access via X 25 Port An FT 2000 OC 48 X 25 port is always provisioned for TL1 and cannot be changed If you are not using a packet switched network then a PAD must be used to connect CPro 2000 directly to an X 25 port FiberReach Access via X 25 Port FiberReach NEs do not support an X 25 port TL1 FiberReach access is provided through its DDM 2000 OC 3 host over the DCC NOTE TLI over CIT is available starting with FiberReach R4 0 CPro 2000 utilizes a concept known as partitioning As the size and complexity of SONET subnetworks continue to grow working with an entire subnetwork can be cumbersome Therefore CPro 2000 partitions the subnetwork into logically divided areas that are easier and faster to work with A partition is a logical grouping of NEs all interoperating on the same high speed SONET media For example each group below contains NEs of the same partition eac
133. ar e Show X Conn e Hide X Conn e Subnetwork View e Report Viewer The Status Bar and Toolbar commands are used to show or hide the status bar and the toolbar on the CPro 2000 GUI The Show and Hide X Conn commands enable a CPro 2000 user to either display or hide cross connections in the Network Element View The Subnetwork View opens a window to display the Subnetwork View The Report Viewer provides the ability to read and print previously saved reports See The Report Menu chapter for information on how to save a report to a file CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The View Menu e 103 Status Bar Toolbar Purpose To display or hide for more room on the screen the status bar that contains the alarm status an information window and trash can icon at the bottom of the CPro 2000 GUI window Procedure 1 From the View pull down menu select Status Bar If Status Bar is shown with a check mark then the status bar is displayed on the GUI If no check mark is shown with the Status Bar command the status bar is not displayed Purpose To display or hide for more room on the screen the toolbar which contains shortcut icons for several CPro 2000 menu items at the top of the CPro 2000 GUI window Procedure 1 From the View pull down menu select Toolbar If Toolbar is shown with a check mark then the toolbar is displayed on the GUI If no check mark is shown with the Toolbar command the toolbar is not displayed
134. are returned to the Subnetwork View The Access Menu e 75 Print Window Purpose To print out your current Subnetwork View window Procedure 1 From the Access pull down window or from the toolbar icon select Print Window The following window appears y Subnetwork Kap View tmprep tmp CPro 2000 E114 subnetwork Wap View March 29 2000 10 56 AM CMT TY CHARA CTERSL OHG Open 2 You can perform the following functions on this map capture e The View function allows you to make the size of the map capture larger or smaller by selecting a value from the View down arrow list e The Print function brings up an abbreviated Print menu so your map capture can be printed 76 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 e The Save function allows you to save your Subnetwork View to a file name so it can be accessed at a later time through the Report Viewer command in the View menu e The Close function enables you to close the Subnetwork using the Save function e The Settings function offers a full selection of print commands Use the Close Settings command to return to the basic functions of the screen but not close the map capture Close Window Purpose To close the window that currently has the focus in the GUI Note that this command does not log a user out of an NE or subnetwork Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Close Window 2 The window that currently has the fo
135. ars Reenter the passwords and click OK 100 e The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Switch DRI Purpose To execute the Dual Ring Interworking DRI manual switch in an FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Edit pull down menu select Switch DRI The following screen appears Set DRI Switch X Close 2 Select the STS3 Tributary address for the DRI switch This is the STS 3 tributary that has the solid line connected to it in the Network Element View of the node 3 Click Operate to enable the DRI switch Click Release to reset the DRI switch At any time you may click Close and your selection is not executed or saved Rename Partition Purpose Instead of using the default sequential numbering scheme that CPro 2000 automatically assigns to your partitions you may decide to rename the partitions For example you may decide to give your partition a name that identifies its contents This command is only available from the Subnetwork View and when a partition has the focus CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu e 101 Procedure 1 From the Edit pull down menu select Rename Partition The following screen appears Partition Ham a ae Enter new name for the partition 2 Type in the new name for the partition and click OK 102 e The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The View Menu Overview The View Menu contains the following command options e Status Bar e Toolb
136. ata Terminal Equipment Data terminal equipment DTE includes control logic buffer store and one or more input output devices for example terminals printers or computers Datakit II VCS Lucent Technologies data switch with low delay that provides high speed data communication between different networks and various computer equipment DCE See Data Communications Equipment DDM 2000 A Lucent Technologies network multiplexer that multiplexes DS1 DS3 or STS 1 inputs into STS 1 OC 3 or OC 12 outputs DRI See Dual Ring Interworking DS1 Digital Signal Level 1 is an ANSI defined signal or service level at 1 544 Mbps equivalent to T1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 DS3 Digital Signal Level 3 is an ANSI defined signal or service level at 44 736 Mbps equivalent to 28 T1 channels or T3 DTE See Data Terminal Equipment Dual Ring Interworking Dual ring interworking DRI is when two ring networks interconnect at two common nodes EC 1 Electrical Carrier 1 is an STS 1 carried electrically FT 2000 Lucent Technologies SONET OC 48 Lightwave system Gateway Network Element A gateway network element GNE is an NE that provides a means of communication between an OS and remote NEs over the SONET data communications channel DCC GNE See Gateway Network Element Graphical User Interface The CPro 2000 graphical user interface GUI consists of a multiple document interface MDI
137. audible alarm or the alarm pager when the local node is a DDM 2000 shelf using TL1 connections In this case the audible alarms and alarm pager features are unavailable for selection For FT 2000s Remote Activity Reporting CPro 2000 automatically enables the FT 2000 from which the alarm status is retrieved the first node logged into for the network element alarm status to be reported when logged in via TL1 CPro 2000 R11 0 provides specific default sounds WAV files for each alarm severity levels critical major and minor These WAV files are referenced in the CPRO INI file You can substitute your own WAV files by editing the CPRO INI file using the Notepad editor Procedure 1 To change the audible alarm status in a network do one of the following e From the Alarms menu select Audible Alarms or mE e Click the Audible Alarm button located in the lower right corner of the screen The feature is enabled if a check mark is visible against the Audible Alarms option and if the Audible Alarms button is pushed in Acknowledging an Alarm When an alarm condition is detected in the network the system sounds the appropriate audible alarm for that alarm level and displays the Network Alarm Detected on dialog box The title bar of this dialog box identifies the detected alarm level For example if a minor alarm is detected in the network the name of the dialog box is MINOR Network Alarm Detected on Network alarms are classifi
138. batch file e Any number of macros can be used in one script line e A macro can be used anywhere in a script any number of times however there can only be one definition for each macro e The input range shown in the dialog box see Macro Example does not apply any validation for the value typed in by the user e There is no data type associated with the input value It is treated as a character string CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Filese 325 Macro Syntax To define a macro place a macro definition statement at the end of the script file When CPro 2000 is r necessary information to prompt the user for a value or to supply a default value A macro is called into a script using the following syntax any_script_statement S MACRO_NAME where the macro name is enclosed by parentheses and preceded by a sign MACRO NAME gets a value returned from the macro definition and uses that value to execute the script statement Macro definition statement syntax is shown below MACRO_NAME Prompt line Range of valid values Default value where the syntax contains the following elements mio e macro name followed by moet e prompt line terminated by a e string containing a range of values followed by a e default value optional Macro Example First the macro call appears in the script file as shown in the following sample transmitt set attr alm almdel S ALARM DELAY
139. be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected 212 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 5 You are prompted to choose a second add drop node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click OK The following screen appears Enter End To End Path ix Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 6 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 7 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK E nter End T o E nd Path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 213 8 The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path Enter an STS 1 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and OC 12 O0C 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U or 29G OLIU NOTE To create a Ring Transport Service path and not a regular two way path the following restrictions must be met e Only a
140. berReach 245 Enter a VT1 5 T1 Locked End to End Path FiberReach ccceeccecceeeeeeeeeeees 249 Three Node Interworking End to End Paths Access Ring Application 00000cceeee 253 Enter an STS 1 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only 254 Enter a VT1 5 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 GG EOE TK SAC WOMAN Yc seca sasecerene tiacennecnce e E E 259 Enter an STS 3C Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 D a E E E Paes E A E E E 263 Four Node Interworking End to End Paths Interoffice Ring Application 270 DDM 2000 Interoffice RINES cccseciseatondesconssesdodescasseansasadormucsaosexeersens dedosont ria ecxe 270 Enter an STS 1 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only 270 Enter a VT1 5 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 only 277 Delete End to End AU acre conmeansaoinn cosonanqeeos anno dnenasauucs sie tacsacirarannssns deanteauwedee dodannetdoanetysdormaias 283 Modi Foc PN CH a sees A santas eee ses sce ae A O 284 Tao RELEE oes coe acee nade E E A E OGA 285 The Alarms Menu 287 Ey recesses cesses sen esse S E EE E E E EEE EO sees 287 Auto Alarm Poling essare a aina RAE A ANAE AAAA RANA 288 PNAC NS Alarms res ecoiac crectnsiian vlosrascladtesastiae decciectac codaetelsee ooadaesiaa oachaiad dadautaedadseciadanaosenavoassdaeaodaseeetocceaece 289 Acknowledging an Alarm ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeee
141. body of a script file supply a prompt string for the variable and supply a default value for the variable When the script is run the user is prompted using the prompt string provided for a value of the variable or the default value is entered by CPro 2000 So whenever user input is desired you can use a macro Macros should be used like mini functions For example macros can be used if the user needs to enter a login ID and password The macro definitions would look like the following LOGIN_ID Enter your login ID here PASSWORD Enter your password here Since these macro definitions have no default value and no range of valid values they contain a colon at the end of them The following is an example of how to use the sample macro definitions listed above transmit LOGIN_ID r transmitt S PASSWORD r These commands cause the login ID and a carriage return to be sent to the NE Then the password and another carriage return are sent to the NE Macros may also be used inside commands that are used to modify parameter values on an NE The following example macro definition asks the user to enter the value for a parameter PARAMETER Enter User Side Network Side Value us This macro definition has no range of values but it contains the default us The following is an example of how this macro definition might be used transmitt no PARAMETER The following conditions apply to using macros in a script or
142. c12 nsa ais Main slots equipped with sig degrade thres 29G U syncmsg dccmode Port amp Line set oc3 rtrv oc3 nsa ais Main slots equipped with sig degrade thres syncmsg dccmode Port amp Line set oc 1 rtrv oc 1 nsa ais sig degrade thres Port amp Line ent crs vtl rtrvors vtl Port amp Line ent crs stsI rtrv ors sts1_ o Channel set vtl rtrv vtl signaldegradethres Sa als nsa ais Mua icc ansaid caine CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 341 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 3 0 3 1 4 0 Channel set sts 1 rtrv sts 1 signaldegradethres signal failure Sa als nsa ais rimary state rimary state rimary state Perf set pmthres line rtrv pmthres line See SpecCond 630 b2 cv 0c3 OC3 for 28G U only b2 cv ocl b2 es b2 esa b2 esb b2 ses uas set pmthres sts 1 rtrv pmthres sts 1 See SpecCond 630 set pmthres vtl rtrv pmthres vt1 See SpecCond 630 342 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 3 0 3 1 4 0 7 KKK KKK KK RK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KK RK E CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 343
143. cess the subnetwork using the CPro 2000 GUI and a data communications script file 1 From the Access menu choose either New Subnetwork or Open Subnetwork NOTE If you select New Subnetwork the Login dialog box is immediately displayed If you select Open Subnetwork a list of previously saved files is displayed Note however that only files saved to the CPro 2000 R11 0 folder are displayed Choose the appropriate file for opening the subnetwork 2 The Login dialog box is displayed and automatically populated with the following defaults e the tabs at the top of the screen indicate the MML interface is the default e the script being used for communication The Script field may display the DEFAULT SCR The DEFAULT SCR contains default communication settings You can select another script file using the Browse button or change the communication settings using the AUI However you must delete the default script file to ensure that CPro 2000 uses the new settings file at login Password Script If you have chosen New Subnetwork you can select Partition Map Partition Inventory or leave both unchecked Selecting either Partition Map or Partition CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Inventory tells CPro 2000 to graphically display the topology of the subnetwork into which you are logged see the Partitioning section earlier in this chapter NOTE If the NE interface is TL1 you must either input a TID or select the TI
144. ch To Update Inventory Gel Access pen Rename 3 Click a node other than the local node the node you are logged into In this example the local node is OC3 12 so OC3 13 is the selected node as shown below Notice that the Login Open Map Partition Inventory Partition Set Access and the Close NodeMan buttons are activated The selected node is outlined in blue CPro Node Manager SA Yew OC3 12 D0DM 2000 OC 3 Rel 15 0 2 L OC3 13 FR2 B Login Hap Partition Sentech To Inventory Partition Set Access Open Rename Close NodeHan 4 Click Set Access The expanded Node Manager window has an attached panel the Set Access Panel CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 83 CPro Node Manager 5 Enter the UserID and Password in the appropriate fields then Click OK OR Click Cancel to return to the unexpanded Node Manager screen without establishing the user ID and password TIP If the user IDs and passwords are the same for all the nodes in the network you can preset access for each of nodes in the ring from this point To do so e Click back on the node for which you just established the user ID and password OC3 13 in the above axample e Click the Set Access button The expanded window redisplays with the last entered userID and password 84 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro Node Manager errs Sentech to HWename e With the Set Access P
145. cnxcetanchicstdacnnstidachSechicinnsdliadsbssediceasebangh teedaconsttan tbh eecieeeete 205 Enter a VT1 5 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 FiberReach and DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U or 29G OLIU circuit pack eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 207 Enter a VT1 5 T1 Two way End to End Path FiberReach ccccecceeeeeeeee 211 Enter an STS 1 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with AU Or Octet crptcttjeo ene cis ta yseea sieges EEAO 214 Enter an STS 3C Two way End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U or 29G OLIU 218 Enter an STS 3 Two way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 0 eee fee Enter an STS 3 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 ee eeeeeeeeeeee 226 Enter an STS 1 Two way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 eee 231 Enter an STS 1 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 ee eeeeeeeeeee 234 Video Service BNG O FAd Pats socciisisicesnessceencastiendaed ausiavcdussess A 239 Enter an STS 3C Video Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU 240 Locked Arc End to End Paths oss sctcos onal nsctencnneieevamndaseatansavncavntee ssdpemstanteosoe es insaauauerexoueuarentvenees 244 Enter a VT1 5 Locked End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 and Fi
146. completed successfully the information is moved to the data cache and the Network Element View is redisplayed This menu item is only available from a Network Element View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select X Conn If cross connections exist in the current NE the NE View is updated to show the current cross connections Alarm NE View only Purpose To update and display the alarm state for the current NE Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Alarm The current NE s alarm state is updated thereby redisplaying the alarm status in the lower left hand corner of the GUI window Active User Purpose To retrieve and display information about users who are logged into an NE Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Active User The following form appears Active User Jef Te Active Users aes m cit 1 DDH 2 Retrieving Date Time TID 1O 27 98217 42 15 2 Click Refresh to update active user information You can click Close at any time to close the form 194 e The Update Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Map Subnetwork View Purpose To update the Subnetwork View by retrieving the topology from all the nodes in the selected partition This menu item is only available from the Subnetwork View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Update Map The Subnetwork View is updated with the topology of the current partition Inve
147. cribed in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 Click the Alarm Status area in the Status Bar or from the Report pull down menu select Alarms A report similar to the following appears Network Element Alarms Report tmprep_tmp a Polini CPro 2o000 larun Report for FT6 2 FI 2000 O amp de Roa fs e March 21 1999 13 41 ie r arrr FT6 2 99 02 21 13 37 38 ls la 3 TS1 MJ PAINTGRT NSA 02 17 17 58 58 path integrity failurey ls la 2 STS1 MJ PAINTGRT NSA 02 17 17 58 48 path integrity failurey ls la 1 TS1 MJ PAINTGRT NSA 02 17 17 58 38 path integrity failurey a A a Se Me s a s bites 4 N Page ofl ir Save i E C qs L CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu e 117 History Purpose To display a history of events for the current node The history report option is only available from a Network Element View As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select History The following screen appears History Report Selection 118 e The Report Menu 2 Choose Entire Report if
148. ct Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS3 signal rate and 1 WAY path type 226 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose an add node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 227 Choose the Tributary sts3 le 1 aw le 4 sts3 le 7 sts3 le 4 Select the tributary that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid tributary numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Add Node Fb 4 Selected Low Speed Is 3b Tributary sts3 1le 5 5 You are prompted to choose the drop node Double click the desired node The following screen appears 228 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low Speed Slot 6 Select the low speed slot for this drop node Click OK The main end to end path form displays Add Node
149. cus in the GUI is closed Close All Windows Purpose To close all the windows including any Network Element Views and the Subnetwork View that are currently displayed This command does not log you out of an NE disconnect you from the subnetwork or exit you from CPro 2000 Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Close All Windows 2 All open windows are closed Login Purpose To log into remote nodes in the local node s subnetwork and is only available from an open Network Element View Procedure In the Access pull down menu the Login command 1s enabled if the desired node has been inventoried at least once and you are not already logged into it Select Login CPro 2000 logs into the node using the user ID and password provided during initial login to the subnetwork CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 77 Logout NOTE Since the DDM 2000 MML systems require that any remote login session currently in progress must be terminated before another remote login session can be established CPro 2000 automatically logs out of one remote session and then performs the user requested remote login If you receive an error while logging in remember to check the information given in the AUI Sometimes this explains exactly why the login attempt or any other command has failed Purpose To log out of the current node For a DDM 2000 it may be either a remote node or a local node This command is on
150. d Note For convenience you can preset the user ID and password for each node in a mixed ring using the Set Access feature in the Node Manager For instructions on how to use this feature see the Node Manager section in The Access Menu chapter CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 33 34 e CPro 2000 Startup To connect to an NE from this point you must either select Connect from the Communications menu in the AUI or click the Connect Disconnect lt 0 button in the AUL a NOTE To view examples of typical subnetwork and NE representations see the GUI Representations section in The User Interfaces chapter iii Connecting to an NE via a Modem This access application is used where the PC running CPro 2000 employs a modem or a data communications network to access the CIT port of an NE CPro 2000 supports three types of modems e Hayes compatible e MultiTech compatible e TrailBlazer compatible If you use a modem that is unsupported by CPro 2000 you can still use the AUI to directly send commands to the modem or you can use a script to send commands to your modem For modem to modem connections asynchronous modems are used at the SONET subnetwork access point and at the PC running CPro 2000 Both are connected to the tele phone network The subnetwork access point is the CIT or X 25 port of a DDM 2000 the CIT port of a FiberReach or for an FT 2000 the DCE CIT port the DTE CIT port o
151. d 22 type circuit pack in the function slots The OC 3 line application parameter for the function unit used in the cross connection must be set to 0x1 2 The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connecunn Properties 3 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect or click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 130 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 5 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example Ty SNC OC12 HH DDM 2000 OC 12 R7 0 wees m mm SNC 0C12 GG NOTE A dual 0x1 cross connection is displayed as a dashed line to differentiate it from the solid line ofa 1 1 two way cross connection Enter VT1 5 Locked Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination low speed slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a locked cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a mai
152. d via the GUI and its corresponding menus are listed in the following table Keyboard shortcuts that can also be used to accomplish certain tasks are shown in parentheses with their respective menu items Menu Item Task Keyboard shortcut Access New Subnetwork Accesses a subnetwork that has not previously been accessed or has no subnetwork information saved for it Access Open Subnetwork Accesses a subnetwork that has subnetwork information that has been saved to a file in a previous CPro 2000 session CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Task Mapping e 61 Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Access Close Subnetwork Disconnects from a subnetwork that is currently Ctrl C being accessed Access Save Subnetwork Saves a subnetwork s information to a file so you Shift Ins can restart your next session with this subnetwork without having to requery the NEs Access Save Subnetwork As Saves a subnetwork s information to a file when Ctrl U you are saving a subnetwork s information for the first time or when you are saving it to a different file name Access Print Window Prints out your Subnetwork view to a printer Subnetwork view only Access Close Window Closes the window that currently has the focus in Ctrl D the GUI Does not log you out of an NE or subnetwork Access Close All Windows Closes all windows that are currently open Does Ctrl A not log you out of an NE or subnetwork Access Login Logs into a re
153. device such as a mouse or CPro 2000 serial communications link the following message appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Alarms Menu e 291 ase 11 0 Alarm Preferences Introduction The Alarm Preference option is central to the alarms feature in CPro 2000 The four tabs of the Alarm Preferences dialog box are e Alarm e Call List e Providers e Pager Test The Alarm Preferences dialog box also provides two buttons OK saves your settings Close dismisses the dialog box without saving your settings The sections that follow describe the functions on each of the tabbed pages in the Alarm Preferences dialog box i The Alarm Tab Use this tab to adjust the repeat interval between alarm sounds change auto alarm polling repeat interval set the communication port for your modem specify a prefix to dial for an outside line and to view or delete the pager log The following sections explain the tasks you can perform from the Alarm Tab of the Alarm Preferences dialog box r N E r E r Alarm Changing the alarm sounds repeat interval 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Change Audible Repeat Seconds to the desired repeat interval from 3 to 30 seconds using the up and down arrows The repeat interval is the number of 292 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Rele seconds that pass from the start of one alarm sound to
154. dify the settings for the current port or to change the DTE port Also to change the protocol back to CIT CAUTION Improper setting of this parameter will interrupt communications Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set CID Secu and then select DCE or DTE The following dialog box displays for DCE SET CID DCE FOR OC48 Port Provisioning Ez Enter SET CID DCE FOR OC48 Option Parameters Port Type a es Current Yalue 7 Time out min Pre The following dialog box displays for DTE SET CID DTE FOR OC4 Port Provisioning Enter SET CID DIE FOR OC48 Option Parameters Port Type fal Mi Curent alue bd _SetValue GetValue Close 2 Click Get Value to see the current settings 3 To update the value use the down arrow list and select the appropriate value 4 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 179 Provisioning Set Feat Options DDM 2000 OC 3 and DDM 2000 OC 12 Purpose To display and or modify the current settings for OC 3 VTPM OC 3 DSIPM and OC 12 STS 3C parameters Procedure l 180 e The Provision Menu From the Provision pull down menu select Set Feat The following dialog box displays for OC 3 SET FEAT FOR OCS Port Provisioning Enter SET FEAT
155. does not contain a cross connection indicating it is not available for cross connection Enter a Range of Two way VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach 132 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 NOTE CPro 2000 R8 0 does not support the creation of ranges of cross connections contiguous or noncontiguous for DDM 2000 OC12 FT 2000 OC 48 or DDM 2000 OC 3 equipped with a 24G U OLIU circuit pack Procedure I 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection e To create a contiguous range such as m 1 1 1 m 1 1 2 m 1 1 3 and so on of cross connections hold the Shift key on your keyboard and click on each of the additional slots or click on the last slot the slots in between are automatically chosen in your range e To create a noncontiguous range such as m1 1 1 m 1 1 3 m 1 2 1 and so on of cross connections hold down the Control key and click on each of the additional slots in the range Release the Shift or Control key and while holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the last destination slot of the range of cross connections The following screen appears when you release the mouse button You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect or click OK and the following screen appears HAIE busses TE E LE a Enter Twoway From tion Execution of this command ma
156. e system is started for a new session Alarm polling is temporarily disabled when any CPro 2000 function such as a backup or a restore is in progress NOTE CPro 2000 displays the highest alarm level reported back by the NE in the bottom left corner of the GUI window Procedure 1 From the GUI click Alarms 2 Select Auto Alarm Polling from the list of options CPro 2000 R11 0 GUI Audible Alarms Purpose To alert the user to the alarm status of the network by sounding the appropriate audible alarm when an alarm is detected in the network The default repeat interval the number of seconds that pass from the start of one alarm sound to the start of the next alarm sound is three seconds To change this repeat interval to a maximum of 30 seconds use the Preferences option in the Alarms menu Refer to the Preferences section of this chapter for instructions on how to change this repeat interval NOTES e The Audible Alarms feature is only available when Auto Alarm Polling is enabled turned on CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Alarms Menu e 289 e A sound card must be installed in your PC for this feature to be available If an alarm is detected when a sound card is not installed CPro 2000 displays a message similar to the following MINOR Network Alarm Detected on TIQ f 2345670901 234567890 The default setting for this feature is off or disabled CPro 2000 does not support alarm polling with the
157. e 1000 end DISCONNECT disconnect exit You can create a default for this macro by entering a value following the last CONNECT_STRING Enter the connect string a z sasorbeeeonacncencascs end of script CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Filese 331 Example Modem Script File This sample modem script file works with Hayes compatible fax data modems This script called modem scr is included with your CPro 2000 software and can be modified to work with other modem types settings coml 9600 e 7 1 none connect At the following line replace phone_number with actual phone number transmitt atdtphone_number r WAITFOR login lt 0 oe warto tarl WAITFOR login lt 0 bE Wied Ove Pass WAITFOR login lt 0 it waitfor fail error mso SNo Joginsg prompt Was TOUNGs lt disconnect exit user msg End Of Serapoc end 332 e Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters Backup Restore Overview The CPro 2000 Backup command is used to create backup files of the current equipage cross connections and provisionable parameters of a network element node The files created during a backup can then be used by the CPro 2000 Restore command for restoration of this data at a later date See the Edit Menu chapter for information on how to backup and restore f
158. e 11 0 Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu or by clicking the toolbar icon Ea select Node Manager The following screen is displayed CPro Node Manager 2 There are several different tasks you can accomplish from this point For example scroll down and click an NE to select it OC3 13 in the following example The Map Partition Inventory Partition and Login buttons become available as shown in the following screen CPro Node Manager OC3 12 D0M 2000 OC 3 Rel 15 0 2 L OC3 135 FR2 B Close Nodebl an Set Access CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 79 80 e The Access Menu 4 To discover a partition containing this NE click either Map Partition or 5 Inventory Partition The Login window appears Login TID UserlB Password Enter your UserID and Password then click OK A new partition is created and displayed on the Subnetwork View The next time you access the Node Manager it also shows the second discovered partition P2 in the subnetwork CPro Node Manager Login A oat Map Sete iri poate inventory d mename J From this screen you can select several tasks as described in the following list Note that the notation L next to an NE means that you are currently logged into it e Click Open or Close to open or close a Network Element View or the Subnetwork View The Open option is only available when Network Element Views
159. e 11 0 Tile Horizontal Purpose To display the open windows on the CPro 2000 GUI in a horizontal format Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Tile Horizontal The open windows are displayed as shown in the following screen CPro 2000 R11 0 GUI OC3 11 DDM 2000 OC 3 A15 1 j ad ak OC3 11 DDM 2000 OC 3 R15 1 Tir z Tt a ceed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Window Menu e 199 Tile Vertical Purpose To display the open windows on the CPro 2000 GUI in a vertical format Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Tile Vertical The open windows are displayed as shown in the following screen CPro 2000 A11 0 GUI Subnetwork View aait ana iar erna atri 200 e The Window Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Arrange Icons Purpose To arrange all iconified windows in an orderly fashion in the CPro 2000 GUI window Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Arrange Icons All iconified windows including both Network Element Views and the Subnetwork View are arranged in an orderly fashion as shown in the following screen CPro 2000 411 0 GUI Subnetwork View Bult Shia ona eatin fig 2 5 x Subnetwork fd a 7 2 5 x JF 2 x CPro 200
160. e P equals a complete valid path e L equals a locked cross connection DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 and FiberReach R3 0 only Bandwidth Usage 114 e The Report Menu Purpose To display a report that details the bandwidth usage between two NEs As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report NOTE The Bandwidth Usage report is displayed by clicking the right mouse button on the optical link between NEs in the expanded partition of the Subnetwork View It is not available through the Report pull down menu Procedure 1 Inthe Subnetwork View click the right mouse button on the optical link between the desired NEs The Bandwidth Usage option appears NOTE The Bandwidth Usage option is enabled only when the entire ring has been inventoried Otherwise it will appear grayed out and cannot be selected 2 Click Bandwidth Usage A report similar to the following appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Bandwidth Usage Report March 19 1999 20 26 For Partition P 1 Thus partition contains 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 netaork elementis Ho of STS channels for this partition seinen a ee BE o ae ata seems e S Map Purpose To display the connectivity in relation to the current node The map report option is only available from a Network Element View As
161. e X 25 port of a DDM 2000 or an FT 2000 OC 48 if connected with a PAD CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Procedure 1 Make sure that all the communications settings are correct for the type of communications connection being made see the Selecting Communications Options section earlier in this chapter 2 From the Communications pull down menu of the AUI select Connect If the menu choice says Disconnect you are already connected You may also connect by clicking on the Connect Disconnect button lt a in the AUI 3 From the Access menu choose either Open Subnetwork or New Subnetwork If you select New Subnetwork the Login dialog box immediately displays If you select Open Subnetwork choose the appropriate file from which the subnetwork is to be opened The Login dialog box displays UserlL serlD S ss i Password Scnpt eS NOTE It is important to delete any script file name that appears in the Script field This ensures that CPro 2000 uses any new settings you specified at login 4 Inthe Login dialog box enter the user ID password and if using TL1 the TID of the NE 5 Check Partition Map or Partition Inventory if you want a graphical display of the topology of the subnetwork you are logged into Leave both unchecked if you only intend to make provisioning changes to the local node see the Partitioning section earlier in this chapter 6 Ifyou selected Partitio
162. e add drop nodes must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack The OC 3 line application parameter must be set to for each add drop node in the ring This is set in the Provision Menu For shelves equippped with 29G OLIUs the Function Slot C fn c must be equipped with a 22 type OLIU The STS3 C feature must be enabled for each node in the ring This feature is enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command also available in the Provision Menu and in TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 On a DDM 2000 OC3 shelf equipped with the 29G OLIU CPro 2000 R11 0 supports setting the OC 3 line application parameter to 0x1 Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS3C and Twoway path type Enter End To End Path 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the first add drop node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot PE 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 219 cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen i
163. e appropriate script file Click OK NOTE If you receive an error message at this point such as Invalid Port Response see the CPro 2000 Software Release Description that accompanies this user manual for details 8 Ifyou selected Partition Map or Partition Inventory from the Login window CPro 2000 automatically logs into each of the NEs in the subnetwork using the user ID and password entered into the Login window NOTE The following Login window appears if one of the NEs in the subnetwork uses a different user ID or password other than the local node or if you have not preset the user ID and password for the nodes in the ring CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 71 UserlB i Password 9 If this window appears type in the correct user ID and password Click OK The GUI window appears containing the appropriate Subnetwork View or Network Element Views for the type of NEs in the subnetwork NOTE To view examples of typical subnetwork and NE representations see the GUI Representations section in The User Interfaces chapter Open Subnetwork Purpose To access a subnetwork that has had its subnetwork information saved to a file during a previous CPro 2000 session All the information that CPro 2000 queries during a session such as NE equipage cross connections and neighbor information can be saved to a file When you access the subnetwork using the file CPro 2000 does not have to requery the NEs
164. e exact information on which TID performs which function prior to creating the individual cross connections that make up a four node interworking ring TIDs must be identified for the following four functions primary node ring A primary node ring B secondary node ring A and secondary node ring B It is also critical that the direction in which the DRI cross connections are to be added is identified in advance for successful subnetwork functionality All low speed connections for DDM 2000 use the following packs e OC 3 or STS 1E DDM 2000 Interoffice Rings When the interoffice ring is a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring or DDM 2000 OC 12 ring two drop and continue nodes are used to connect to each of the two access rings or to a single access ring and then off the network for example connecting to a point of presence POP to a long distance carrier where traffic terminates Enter an STS 1 Four Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS1 signal rate and 4 Node Intwk path type 270 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the primary node for Ring A Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 3 Select the low sp
165. e for either VT1 5 cross connections or STS 1 add drop cross connections Dragging STS 1s down below the green line allows access to 28 VT1 5 signals per STS 1 For 24G OLIUs a maximum of 3 STS 1s may have VT granularity any three the user wishes to choose For 29G OLIUs VT granularity is supported across all 12 STS Is To drag and drop an STS 1 to a box below the green line e Click on a desired STS 1 box above the green line An X appears Notice the address displayed in the status bar CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 49 e While still holding down the left mouse button drag the X to one of the three boxes CPro 2000 R10 0 GUI 0C3 4 DDM 2000 0C 3R150 h e Release the mouse button The grid that appears in the box displays the 28 VT1 5 equivalent of the STS 1 50 e The User Interfaces CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 You can drag and drop any of the STS 1s from above the line to any vertically stacked box below the line The grid that appears displays the VT1 5 equivalent of the newly inserted STS 1 Blue shading in any cell indicates the existence of cross connections Note that unlike the boxes above the green line the left and right vertically stacked boxes below the green line m1 and m2 are clones of each other Therefore the address for the last row of the left column of the left m 6 box for example corresponds to the last row of the first column in the right
166. e one rotation of the ring They always contain one source at the add location and a sink at the drop location There can be more than one sink or drop in a video path as shown in the following illustration Because a video path only uses one rotation of the ring a single time slot may contain two video paths The following illustration shows two Video Service paths The first path denoted by the solid line shows the signal being added at Node A the source and put on Rotation 2 through circuit pack mb1 It follows the ring dropping at Nodes G E C and B The second path denoted by the dashed line is put on Rotation 1 through circuit pack mb2 It follows the ring dropping at Nodes C E and F DDM 2000 OC 12 Ring CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 239 Enter an STS 3C Video Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U OLIU NOTE For the STS 3C path type to be available the following restrictions must be followed e A low speed slot in the Video Source and Video Sink nodes must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack e The OC 3 Lines application parameter in the Provision menu must be set to Video for each Video Source and Video Sink node in the ring e The STS 3C feature must be enabled for each node in the ring This feature 1s enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command also available in the Provision Menu and in TL1
167. e pager service provider To view this information 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Providers tab The following window appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Alarms Menu e 299 ase 11 0 Alarm Preferences NOTES e The Providers tabbed page is read only and cannot be edited e The name and telephone number for the pager service provider as shown in the above window e The Add Edit and Delete buttons are grayed out and unavailable in CPro 2000 Release 11 0 e Clicking either OK or Close exists the Alarm Preferences dialog box iv The Pager Test Tab The Pager Test tab allows you to test your new pager setup Use this tab to send a test message to a new pager setup and to view the results To test a new pager setup 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Pager Test tab The following window appears 300 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Rele CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 In the Subscriber Pager Number field type the PIN number of the pager to which you would like the test message sent In the Message Text section type the test message Note that the test message should not exceed 240 characters In the Address Type section select the appropriate pager type Click 1 way for a one way pager and 2 way
168. e the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path ix Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 8 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 9 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path x Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed 10 The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path 210 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Access Edit View Report Provision Update Window XConns Alarms Help lal SNC OC3 F MegaStar 2000 R9 1 I tr a 3 Tie Enter a VT1 5 T1 Two way End to End Path FiberReach Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for VT1 5 T1 signal rate and Twoway path type CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 211 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the first add drop node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can
169. eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Special Conditions SpecCond 110 1 For DDM OC 3 NEs the backup procedure shall ignore the missing circuit pack BBF5 message under the following conditions Shelf 3 is used AND 2 27 type OLIU is NOT installed Note Since BBF5 is detected through a 27 type OLIU any installed BBF5 will not be detected without the 27 type OLIU even if it is installed Under this condition the error message should be suppressed to avoid confusion SpecCond 120 For DDM OC 3 that may be equipped for the MegaStar configuration MegaStar is denoted by the following conditions 1 RTRV SYS returns product MegaStar 2000 and 2 BBG8 SYSCTL circut pack has S1 1 OFF S1 2 OFF S1 3 OFF and 3 RTRV OC3 returns RADIO yes SpecCond 338 Restore commands ENT xxx shall not be issued to unequiped resources for DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach Restore commands can be issued to unequiped resources in FT because it supports pre provisioning SpecCond 510 When the value to be restored exceded the valid range the default value shall be used instead Both the default value and the range are provided in the Parameter Values Tables SpecCond 520 Security restoration shall be conducted only in the MML mode for both FT and DDM network elements Passwords are always encripted and cannot be restored CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 377
170. ease Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 13 0 13 5 15 0 set pmthres vtl rtrv pmthres vt1 See SpecCond 630 Perf set pmthres t rtrv pmthres t See SpecCond 630 day es l day cvpsf day cvpesf day esp day sesp day uasp day cvpfe day espfe day sespfe day uaspfe Perf set pmthres t rtrv pmthres t See SpecCond 630 gh es l qh cvpsf qh cvpesf qh esp qh sesp qh uasp qh cvpfe qh espfe qh sespfe qh uaspfe CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 357 x KK KM KK KK MK X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X x KKK OA O KK KM Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Switch rtrv sys product id System ent sys rtrv sys new tid cort idle shelf x25ps KK KKK Ea mo o e pe FA tmout a ad E uap msgtype c Comm ent osacmap rtrv osacmap V snpa acid ee 358 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 Rf o Comm ent ulsdcc 13 rtrv ulsdcc 13 l3org l3res lI3rd l3area 13lv2is Comm ent ulsdcc l4 tdc Comm rtrv ulsdcc 14 l4tlif l4tItm 14t2tm
171. ecified at login 5 Inthe Login dialog box enter the user ID password and if using TL1 the TID of the NE NOTE NCC does not support MML Therefore when connecting through the NCC make sure you Select the TL1 tab 6 Check Partition Map or Partition Inventory if you want a graphical display of the topology of the subnetwork you are logged into Leave both unchecked if you only intend to make provisioning changes to the local node see the Partitioning section earlier in this chapter 7 Click OK When login is complete the CPro 2000 GUI window that appears displays the appropriate NE View Password Aging introduced in DDM 2000 OC3 R15 x and FiberReach R4 0 The password aging feature enhances security by allowing administrators with privileges to set or edit logins that specify the length of time for which the general user s password is valid At the end of the specified period the password expires and the user must change the password to gain access to the networks 36 e CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Procedure 1 Log on to CPro 2000 in the usual manner 2 Ifyou attempt to log on to an NE when your general user login has expired the message in the AUI alerts you The following dialog box also appears Change Password 3 Type the new password in the appropriate field then retype the password where indicated 4 Press OK for the new password to take effect Troubleshooting To
172. ed General Conventions Listed below are the general text conventions used throughout this manual e The word select is used to indicate the activation of a menu command or a command button in a dialog box or Help window e The phrase click OK means that you can either click the OK button with the mouse or in most cases you can press the Enter key on the keyboard to carry out the action e Bold type indicates words characters keys or items that you type point to click or press Titles of chapters being referenced in this manual also appear in bold type e Italic type indicates NE commands and important new terms Titles of external documentation that is referenced also appear in italic type e Computer voice type indicates system messages shown on your screen Mouse Conventions At a minimum a two button mouse is required for operating CPro 2000 If you have a multiple button mouse CPro 2000 assumes that you have configured the left mouse button as the primary mouse button Any procedure that requires you to click with the mouse refers to the use of this left mouse button unless otherwise specified e Point means to position the mouse cursor so that the tip of the cursor rests on the item you want to point to on the screen for example Point to STS 1 e Click means to press and immediately release the mouse button without moving the mouse for example Click VT1 5 e Double
173. ed as minor major or critical To acknowledge an alarm e When an alarm is detected in the NE a dialog box similar to the following appears 290 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 MINOR Hetwork Alarm Detected on Fj Title Bar displays the level of the alarm detected TID identifies the name of the network e Click the Silence button or press the space bar to acknowledge the alarm and dismiss the dialog box Pager Purpose To alert users to network alarms by calling a pager number associated with the alarm level NOTES e Before you use the Pager feature you must ensure that a modem is installed according to the manufacturers recommendations e The Pager features are only available if Auto Alarm Polling is enabled on The default pager setting is off e The pager feature supports only alpha numeric pagers with SkyTel subscriber service Procedure 1 Within the Alarm Preferences menu select the comm port that corresponds to your modem in the Modem Comm Port field of the Alarm page 2 Activate the pager feature by doing one of the following e From the Alarms menu select Pager or e Click the Pager button located in the lower right corner of the GUI The feature is enabled if a check mark is visible against the Pager option and if the Pager button is pushed in If the system does not recognize the comm port for example if the selected comm port is connected to another
174. ed slots DS3 EC1 or OC3 Each contains four slots Every low speed slot contains three STS 1 time slots that represent the DS3 ports on DS3 slot EC1 ports on EC1 slot or STS 1 tributaries on OC3 slot The Menu Bar You can access CPro 2000 functions with the menu bar in the GUI window In addition you can access some of these commands can be accessed with the right mouse button pop up menu Listed below are the menu names and the types of commands they contain e Items that pertain to logging into or out of the NEs are in the Access Menu This menu also allows the user to run batch command files print windows save the current subnetwork s information to a file open the Node Manager and to exit the CPro 2000 application e Operations for backing up restoring and changing TIDs or passwords are in the Edit Menu e Use the View Menu to show or hide cross connections and to change the way the toolbar and status bar in the GUI are viewed You can also access the Subnetwork View Report Viewer and toggle the Auto Alarm Polling feature from the View menu e Use the Report Menu to retrieve path information equipment information alarm status NE history MML only provisioning and performance monitoring reports All of the reports are available in the Report Viewer e Use the Provision Menu to modify port line provisioning and NE options e Use the Update Menu to requery the NEs about the current cross connections Partition or Ne
175. ed that you use the rpt and eep suffixes when saving these types of files to avoid confusion with ordinary text files such as those witha t xt suffix If you do try to open a non report file with the Report Viewer an error message displays and you are prompted to select another file name CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The View Menu e 105 Procedure 1 Inthe View pull down menu click Report Viewer The following screen appears Select 4 Report File yk J progra 1 Ey cprorl1 0 2 Inthe File Name field type in the name of the report you wish to view and click OK You can click Cancel at any time to dismiss this screen and return to the CPro 2000 GUI 3 The report is displayed in a window similar to the following Map Report CPro 2000 Map Report for sl Oe bap February 03 1996 10 25 7 Neighbor Map for SNC OC1Z DD Connected Conn Product Through Status WAPBWING The information displayed may be incomplete Check Boryv Alm report for further details SHC OCLA DDB PDM OCL SHC OC1LEA CC DDM OC1Le Settings E l 106 e The View Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 You can perform the following functions on the report e The View function allows you to make the size of the report larger or smaller by selecting a value from the View down arrow list e The Page function can be accessed two ways By using the arrows lt lt lt gt gt gt you can go through the report page by
176. eed slot for the primary node for Ring A Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 271 Choose the Timeslot m 1 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected 272 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 5 You are prompted to choose the secondary node in Ring A Double click the desired node The following screen appears 6 Select the low speed slot for the secondary node in Ring A Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 273 7 You are prompted to choose the primary node for Ring B Double click the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot E3 b 1 8 Select the low speed slot for the primary node in Ring B Click OK The main end to end path form appears 274 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 9 You are prompted to select the secondary node for Ring B Double click the desired node The following
177. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 l E Wr AEE E TAE EAN E ibd ed cies stad NN EEEE EA T E E 291 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Contentse v vi e Contents Alarm FP FETS HCMC S ce cns decudosacadicnnadatndn aa a Seaanhonsnboadngetendsk 292 PAGO GNC TIO seise a 292 e NEAN E a E E E A EET EATA 292 e TBE CAE Te E EAE A A A PAR Hi The Providers Taboeiro a E EAE EAEE 299 ive Loe Pacer cis ol 6 nn een ee eae eee 300 The Help Menu 303 CTV e AE E A E E EA 303 CPro 2000 TE Drise a E ee ee ee ee eee 304 ADONC Pro 2 OO ea E A EEA EE EAE AN EA 304 Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands 305 DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Command Set cccccccccccessssssssssesesseeeeeeeeeeees 305 POOS a E E E E E 305 Commands Cross Reference Table ccccccccsssesescccccceceeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeeeccceeeeeeeeaaas 305 DDM 2000 OC 3 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures ccccccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 PIO Se r E E E sated 308 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported in CPro 2000 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 308 Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands 311 DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual Command Set cccccccccccccceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 311 PIO Se e A E E E E E ak Cross Reference Table mesnet icin EE a EE aA a iS 311 DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures ccceseeeseeeeeeeeeees 314 POS e E A O E E E 314 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Sup
178. eighbor nodes as shown in the example below The node that is currently selected is highlighted in magenta 26 e CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 W ma aCe Ps SNC OC3 C If an unsupported partition is opened the NE icon displays with Unsupported Type and the TID appears beneath The following is an example Unsupported Type HO TITAN The Partition Map Taking a Partition Map is less comprehensive than taking a Partition Inventory The Partition Map operation allows the user to retrieve the partition topology from all nodes in the current partition and display this information in the Subnetwork View Performing a Partition Map operation is sufficient for displaying connectivity information of the NE nodes in a discovered ring However for performing subnetwork level tasks such as creating or deleting an end to end path performing a Partition Inventory is essential To map a partition do one of the following e check Partition Map in the Login dialog box The Partition Map is taken during the login See the Accessing the Subnetwork section later in this chapter for more information OR e select Partition Map from the Node Manager window if you did not select Partition Map at login or to map other partitions in the subnetwork See the Node Manager section in The Access Menu chapter for more information Level 2 Nodes NOTE In CPro 2000 an L2 node is an NE provisioned as a Level 2
179. en appears 250 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click OK The following screen appears 5 Select the Ring ID The Ring ID establishes which way the pass through cross connections which are between the locked cross connections should be created It also determines on which side the locked cross connections leave an NE Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 251 6 9 252 e The End to End Path Menu You are prompted to choose another node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click OK The following screen appears Enter End To End Path Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path X Enter End To End Path Operation successtully completed The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Three Node Interworki
180. ence 1 COM port name for example COM1 or COM2 This setting may be excluded 2 colon This is excluded if the COM port name is not specified 3 baud rate for example 9600 or 4800 4 comma 5 parity for example e o or n 6 comma 7 data bits for example 7 or 8 8 comma 9 stop bits for example 1 or 2 10 comma 11 handshaking This command can be used before or after connecting to a COM port Examples SETTINGS COM1 9600 e 7 1 none settings 4800 8 2 DISCONNECT Disconnects from the COM port The open bracket symbol used in an IF or ELSE statement The close bracket symbol used in an IF or ELSE statement string A semicolon symbol used at the beginning of a statement that indicates that this line contains a comment where string is the comment CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Filese 323 Example This is a comment Functions The use of functions is supported in CPro 2000 script and batch files Functions can be used to do repetitive blocks of commands The following conditions apply to using functions in a CPro 2000 script or batch file e Function definitions should be kept at the very end of a script or batch file following END or EXIT statements e A maximum of 10 parameters are permitted in a function e Do not use a GOTO statement inside of a function unless it is within a compound statement like IF e A GOTO stateme
181. er with an FT 2000 OC 48 the user may enter end to end paths between nodes that have open Network Element Views and have had individual NE inventories from the Update Menu To create an end to end path within a subnetwork you are prompted through a simple sequence of on line forms Once the path addresses have been chosen CPro 2000 creates the cross connections in the NEs to form the end to end path Users creating end to end paths with CPro 2000 should be familiar with the procedures outlined in the user service manuals for the NE equipment The procedures in this manual are not a substitute for the user s skill and understanding of the process involved with creating paths in NEs In fact neither this manual nor CPro 2000 provide the test procedures necessary to verify the proper functioning of a newly created path You must implement the test procedures from the appropriate user service manuals NOTE No changes are made to any NE until the user has chosen OK Therefore the user can cancel the operation or clear the current information at any time prior to clicking the OK button Two Endpoint End to End Path Across a Single Ring Setting up a two endpoint end to end path around a single ring using CPro 2000 is accomplished by accessing the End to End Path Menu while in the Subnetwork View NOTE The procedures in this section also apply to paths created in open rings which may only contain one endpoint A form appears prom
182. erial Link cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessssesesseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 1 Connecting to an NE Manually cccccccccccccccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeess 30 li Connecting to an NE Using a Login Script cccccccccccccccceeeeccceeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees a2 iii Connecting to an NE via a Modem ccccccccccccccssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeess 34 Connecung toan NE over A P ereenn ee N EE Ee Password Aging introduced in DDM 2000 OC3 R15 x and FiberReach R4 0 ee 36 Tonbe NGO E EE 37 The User Interfaces 39 ys aces na asc E A EEE EE E E EA T E E 39 Introduction to the User InterfaceSs nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnereeseessrrrrrerererrrrrerrrerrrrrerrrrrrrrrerrerrrreseees 39 Usma the Inter taces Fole enaa edie ee aea tector Meena eneratestuclinenenedieitote 40 The Craphical Se tte Se anceirssecectesetionselsnesdaeyabicest E EEE E E E 40 Navodno EGUI cepe g E EEEE E E RE 41 TAG TODA eea E E A E E 41 The MUS D a E E E E E AN 41 Thel aneel Dialoo BOX qemeeneretre meter cereale iter n E N 42 GULREprese niato eeni a e a aa 43 The Subnetwork Vie Weasinierniione a a ENEE 46 The Network Element View w cisciinecscssiinnedataseasseidd auleadonaccanedenedetuerssiaadienelesMinntonsedenss 47 Ao Uger merne ne ns en ct ee eee E eee 54 Printinge Reports and Windows sissiiesiiiocrisni ines a ea a aada 58 Pin ne AUL cS a 1 hs sea EEE A AE 58 PRTG Window S erien a a A 39 Task
183. erminates script execution normally TEMP_EXIT Provides a recallable exit point from the script file and stops the script execution temporarily CPro 2000 keeps a marker LAST EXIT POINT where the execution is halted When you execute the same script again it optionally allows you to run it from the point where it halted previously This statement should be used with STEP label where label is any word NOTE The TEMP EXIT statement syntax is similar to the GOTO statement and can be used the same way Example STEP START If this step fails quit fix error and execute this step again from its beginning TEMP_EXIT NOTE The abe must be specified in the script file it should be preceded by a and appended by a colon for example advice GOTO label This is a C like GOTO statement that starts execution from the next line label where label is any word Examples GOTO CONNECT ERROR goto advice NOTE The abe must be specified in the script file it should be preceded by a and appended by a colon for example advice 322 e Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 CONNECT Connects to the COM port NOTE COM port settings are specified with the SETTINGS command The default settings are COM2 9600 e 7 1 none SETTINGS string Sets the COM port to given settings where string is enclosed between double quotations and contains the following in sequ
184. esp fend sesp fend uasp fend sesf k CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 349 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd 350 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions See SpecCond 630 day esl nend day cvp nend day esp nend day sesp nend day uasp nend day cvp fend day esp fend day sesp fend day uasp fend See SpecCond 630 qh esl nend qh cvp nend qh esp nend qh sesp nend qh uasp nend qh cvp fend qh esp fend qh sesp fend qh uasp fend CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 13 0 KOKO KOA KK KK RK KK KM KM KK RK KKK KK KK RK KK KK KM KK 13 5 15 0 x KK KKM KK RK KKK KK KK RK Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML Backup Cmd Special Conditions n Swith o ovne Product ID x i o Switth ttrvow Orderwire mode BBG10 OHCTL needed System set ne rtrv ne tid X X co rt X x idle channel signal X x shelf X X rnestat agne almgrp PKT size Security set secu rtrv secu security timeout porttype echo baudrate User Type Comm ent tll msgmap rtrv tll msgmap acid msgtype action paspepees hiees Ph CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 351 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table fo
185. ess Menu From the Access pull down menu select Save Subnetwork The current subnetwork information is saved to the existing subnetwork file CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Save Subnetwork As Purpose To save a subnetwork s information to a file so that you can restart your next CPro 2000 session using the current subnetwork s information Use this command when you are saving a subnetwork s information for the first time or if you want to save the subnetwork s information to a file name that is different from an existing file name Procedure l CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 From the Access pull down menu select Save Subnetwork As The following screen appears Select File for saving subnetwork Syck Ej progra 1 3 cprorl1 0 Subnetwork Files snw gt Navigate to the CPro 2000 installation directory to access the Subnetwork Files If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 1 cprorl 11 0 Type in a new file name or choose one of the other existing file names If you choose a name that is already in use a warning appears select File for Saving Subnetwork e If you want to replace the existing file with a new one click Yes e Ifyou do not want to replace the existing file click No then rename the new file Click OK or click Cancel if you do not want to save this subnetwork s information to a file You
186. etwork entirely you should also use the AUI to log back into the local node prior to continuing with your current CPro 2000 session The Graphical User Interface The Graphical User Interface GUI consists of a multiple document interface MDI which can accommodate a Subnetwork View and several Network Element Views An MDI consists of one main window that contains multiple subwindows In this case the CPro 2000 GUI window is the main MDI window The Subnetwork View and Network Element Views are the subwindows e The Subnetwork View is a graphical representation of the subnetwork topology including partitions A partition is a logical grouping of NEs interoperating on the same high speed SONET line NOTE For more information on partitioning see the Partitioning section in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter e A Network Element View is a graphical representation of the cross connections ports slots and tributaries associated with an NE Several Network Element Views can be displayed at once Note that a Network Element View must be active to execute NE level tasks such as establishing cross connections See the Subnetwork View and The Network Element View sections later in this chapter for further details on the components of these windows and how they are used 40 e The User Interfaces CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Navigating the GUI You can switch the focus of the GUI and toggle between the Subnetwor
187. example P 1 P 2 NOTE For details on how to customize partition names see the Rename Partition section in the Edit Menu chapter When partitions are initially discovered and therefore displayed in the Subnetwork View they are in an unexpanded format The unexpanded partition shows only the partition name and the type of NE contained in the partition The following is an example of a DDM 2000 OC 3 ring partition icon fay Qa P 1 If the partition contains an unsupported NE the partition icon displays with Unsupported Partition The following is an example of an unsupported partition icon Unsupported Partition P 1 CPro shows two partitions displays both icons shown above if it discovers one or more unsupported NEs in a ring In this case the user should inventory any closed ring containing no unsupported NEs first before others NOTE Although CPro can discover unsupported NEs their presence restricts CPro functionality For example the End to End Path pull down menu is disabled when the Subnetwork View contains an unsupported partition End to end paths cannot be created in a partition containing an unsupported NE You can display the expanded version of a supported partition by double clicking on the partition icon or by using the right mouse button pop up menu in the Subnetwork View The expanded version shows each NE in the partition including its Target Identifier TID and connectivity to its n
188. for the desired node If the userID and password for the selected node is the same as that used in the Login window CPro 2000 uses that information to log into the desired node and display the NE view If the userID and password for the selected node differs from that used in the Login window the following Login window appears TID UserlB Password e Enter the UserID and Password for the selected node and then click OK The NE view for the selected node displays e You may use the Set Access to preset login information for other nodes if they differ from that used in the Login window To do so follow the instructions provided earlier this section Run Batch Commands Purpose To allow the CPro 2000 user to execute batch files containing groups of commands such as NE initialization commands or NE options not currently supported in the CPro 2000 menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 87 This feature may be used for rapid turnup of new installations using preestablished local standards NOTE See Appendix D Script and Batch Files for information on writing script or batch files Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Run Batch Commands The following screen appears x Select A Script File ddm_scr F n ah default scr y progra 1 ft scr modem cr EJ cprorl1 0 Script Files scr _ Navigate to the CPro 2000 installation directory to access the Script File
189. g Ctrl C or selecting Copy from the Edit menu e In the AUI window place the insertion point next to the final prompt Then press Ctrl V or select Paste from the Edit menu to paste the command e Follow the prompts in the AUI to execute the command then press Enter e Repeat the above procedure for other commands in the Notepad window copying the commands into the AUI one at a time When you have entered all the commands into the AUI close out of CPro 2000 then restart after the last command is executed NOTES If the command to change the TID Tid is listed in the Notepad window place it last in the AUI Restart CPro 2000 for the process to take effect For FT 2000s if the restore requires the ent ulsdcc 13 command to be executed enter this command last in the AUI then restart CPro 2000 for the process to take effect For DDM 2000 R15 0 and FiberReach R4 0 CPro 2000 automatically restores all commands 98 e The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The following Restore Summary report displays Restore Report tmprep_ tmp CPro 2000 Restore summary Report for OC 12 2 DDOM 2000 OC 12 RY 1 August 30 2000 amp 10 25 Equipage Differences Mo equipment differences were found between the backup file and the network element Hardware Switch Setting Differences Mo hardware switch setting differences were found between the backup file and the network element Login Names from the backup file
190. g box CPro 2000 will attempt to re establish communication with the NE at this point If you are logged out of the node reconnect to the node through the AUI If you are unable to reconnect through the AUI close the subnetwork from the GUI select New Subnetwork from the Access Menu then enter the UserID and Password in the Login window 6 Click Close at any time to end the session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value your changes will not be saved CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Provisioning T1 Ports FiberReach Procedure 1 From the Provision Pull down menu select T1 Ports The following dialog box displays T1 Port Provisioning Port Address Failure Threshold lIBPY to LOS State PM Mode Formal 2 Choose a port address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port address box A list of all T1 port addresses for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a port address is chosen click Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters 4 To update values use the down arrow lists at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you
191. ger Test Tab Message to PIN P Alarms Preferences Pager Test Tab Message Text M Alarms Preferences Pager Test Tab Send S Alarms Preferences Pager Test Tab Clear C Alarms Preferences Pager Test Tab Address Type T Help CPro 2000 Help Provides an on line version of the CPro 2000 User Manual CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Removes entries from the Call List window Confirms a command to edit add or delete an entry in the Call List window Cancels a command to edit add or an delete entry in the Call List window Accepts test messages entered by the user Dynamically displays progress of the test Transmits the test message Removes entries from the Message to PIN field and the Message Text field Specifies the pager type Task Mapping e 67 68 e Task Mapping CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu Overview The Access Menu contains commands that can open close and save subnetworks open and close Network Element Views log into and out of network elements execute batch files and exit CPro 2000 The Access pull down menu contains the following command options New Subnetwork Open Subnetwork Close Subnetwork Save Subnetwork Save Subnetwork As Print Window Close Window Close All Windows Login Logout Node Manager Run Batch Commands Open Partition Close Partition Open NE Exit CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 69 New S
192. ges are displayed in the CPro AUI and any interactive session messages are interspersed with the autonomous messages from the NE When set to 0 autonomous messages are not displayed and an interactive session via the AUI is unaffected by autonomous messages The INI File Editor Overview The initialization file CPro ini controls the default settings for the user configurable parameters initialized by CPro 2000 The INI File Editor feature provides a graphical means of editing this file thereby minimizing the risk of corruption to the file Using the INI File Editor you can edit parameters in the INI file such as the communication interface communication mode and alarm polling without directly manipulating the contents of the file Note that the INI File Editor is available only if the Subnetwork View is closed The INI File Editor is made up of four tabs each of which is discussed in the sections that follow e Interface Settings e Com Port Defaults e Transparency e Advanced i The Interface Settings Tab Use the Interface Settings tab to perform tasks such as setting the communication mode setting the communication interface and setting alarm polling For a detailed description of the settings in this tab refer to the Customizing CPro 2000 Settings section of this chapter The following sections explain the tasks you can perform from this tab 18 e Installation CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 CPro int
193. gx proc3frmlgx proc3tolgx opoc12frmlgx opoc 1 2tolgx procl2frmlgx proc 2tolgx swprty actswprty gueswprty ntfcncde sdthr pst sst fmt async linecde ntfcncde omode pbit sdthr pmmode pst sst Special Conditions speccond 640 for oc3frmlgx for oc3tolgx for oc12frmlgx for oc12tolgx p fm is provision as auto CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 9o jk fd eee Coie ee all Lan an an an ae a oe ae ee oe se se a a ae T O mk Cc Tt Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 continued QO p K Ke d cme a a a Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions Perf set th ec 1 rtrv th ec 1 montype thlev locn dirn tmper tcarpt Perf set th oc3 rtrv th oc3 montype thlev locn dirn tmper tcarpt rtrv th oc12 montype thlev locn dirn tmper tcarpt Perf set th oc48 rtrv th oc48 montype thlev locn dirn tmper tcarpt Perf set th sts 1 rtrv th sts1 montype thlev locn dirn tmper tcarpt CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 375 aaa an anal Lan a a ae oe se se ie A An An an an ale an a oe oe ee Ed oe oe a ae fe oe aa Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FT 2000 with TL1 continued O N2 ok rennet ia Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 8 1 Perf set th t3 rtrv th t3 montype thlev locn dirn tmper tcarpt 376
194. h discreet ring within a multi ring environment all linear NEs directly connected to each other including chains hubs point to point or linear extensions CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 each open ring subtending from other SONET media of higher bandwidth Open ring is discussed in greater detail in the section Ring Transport Service in the End to End Path Menu chapter The Partition Inventory Lucent Technologies SONET NEs are designed to possess the intelligence necessary for each NE in the subnetwork to be aware of itself and of the other NEs in the same subnetwork This SONET NE capability which is used by CPro 2000 to derive the Partition Inventory is accomplished simply by querying the NEs CPro 2000 does not require interfaces to OSs that have a network database and it does not require the user to manually create a database CPro 2000 derives its necessary information by querying the NEs and using this data for subnetwork level operations The Partition Inventory is updated for all operations performed from the GUI If you need to perform subnetwork level tasks such as creating or deleting an end to end path then taking an inventory of each partition in the subnetwork is essential If on the other hand you need to perform operations on a single node taking a single NE inventory is sufficient See the Inventory NE View section in The Update Menu chapter for more information If you do not check Partiti
195. h files 33 69 71 87 88 319 324 329 Baud rate 16 29 34 189 323 383 C Call List Tab 66 67 295 96 298 99 Cancel dialog box 42 Capture Menu 57 Cascade 65 197 98 Change LocA and LocZ 125 154 Change Pass XE Password word 63 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Change Password 91 100 313 315 Change TID 62 91 99 316 CIT port 1 23 24 30 32 34 383 Close Partition 62 69 89 Close All Windows 62 69 77 Close Subnetwork 62 69 73 Close Window 62 69 77 Color conventions 39 41 53 COM port 6 18 19 24 32 74 320 21 323 Com Port Defaults Tab 19 Communications Menu 30 34 56 57 Connect Preferences 19 28 31 34 56 Connecting to an NE over TCP IP 35 Connecting to an NE via Serial Link 30 CPRO INI 12 16 17 33 289 90 CPro 2000 installation 9 33 71 72 75 88 92 CPro 2000 program group 386 Cross connection creation 123 Cross connection deletion 42 157 159 Cross Connections 5 6 22 37 329 Customer assistance 5 6 37 D Data communications channel DCC 23 64 385 Data communications script 16 30 32 327 330 Datakit 384 DDM 2000 OC 12 7 44 47 95 104 124 128 130 134 136 162 64 166 69 171 72 180 203 6 214 218 239 40 263 64 270 288 311 314 DDM 2000 OC 3 7 23 26 43 44 47 48 51 53 95 104 114 123 26 127 33 142 43 159 162 64 166 69 172 180 81 183 185 86 188 203 205 7 214 24445 253 259 270 277 288 305 308 9 377
196. h text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 185 Provisioning Set Lan DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 Purpose To provide LAN Local Area Network connectivity between networks in different locations Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select Set LAN The following screen appears for DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 SET LAN Port Provisioning Enter SET LAN Option Parameters Address Group ID 0 255 ATM Adapt Laver 5 Virtual Path ID 0 255 Virtual Channel ID 0 655345 Frame Length ATH Scrambler ATH Polynorm FCS Alarm Level PH Mode 2 Click Get Value to display how the node is currently configured 186 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 SET LAN Port Provisioning Enter SET LAN Option Parameters Address Group ID 0 255 ATM Adapt Laver 5 Virtual Path ID 0 255 Virtual Channel ID 0 65535 Frame Length ATH Scrambler ATH Polynom FCS Alarm Level PH Mode 3 Use the down arrow lists to select the options appropriate for the node you are configuring NOTES e The LAN Address all is not vailid in TL1 mode e Ifcross connects are present in the
197. he appropriate commands NOTE You must click inside the AUI window or click one of the AUI menu items to activate the AUI cursor The cursor does not automatically appear when you change focus to the AUI The AUI also provides the user with a powerful terminal emulator that can be used for many tasks other than connecting to a subnetwork NOTE Commands that affect the state of equipment or cross connections in the NE can cause the GUI and the AUI to become unsynchronized After working in the AUI it is always advisable to update the GUI by reissuing the Partition Inventory or the NE Inventory command see the Using the Interfaces Together section earlier in this chapter The AUI can also be used to set up and save modem specifications through the use of the Communications menu The user can enter the modem type and dial string in the Modem Commands dialog box For details see the Selecting Communications Options from the AUI section in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter SLC 2000 Access Use the CPro 2000 AUI to control the low speed side of an SLC 2000 After logging into the SLC 2000 type dlc in the AUI dlc stands for digital loop carrier You can now issue commands to the low speed side of the SLC 2000 See the SLC 2000 documentation for further information To exit the low speed side of the SLC 2000 type sonet The Menu Bar and Toolbar The types of menu items displayed in the menu bar depend on whether you are connected
198. he form you are prompted to select the Secondary Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen appears 256 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 8 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node Click OK The main end to end path form displays EnterEnd ToEndPath sss lt ssSsisi i r s DCS OC3 2 mi T mi m 9 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path x CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 257 10 You may click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path 11 Click OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path gt CPro 2000 R6 2 GUI OC3 1 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 1 2 258 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter a VT1 5 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach only Procedure 1 From End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available to select Click the VT1 5 and 3 Node Intwk tabs 2 At the bottom of the f
199. hen Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter 2 You can click Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the DRI PRI twoway icon fifth from left hand side of toolbar You can also select the Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists 3 Click OK and the following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 149 SNC FT D2 Seco ieee eeu ean Sue Enter Twoway DRIPRI lz 2a sts3 1w 6 SNC FT C1 SNC FT C1 mmand may affect service Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example for a two way STS 3 DRI PRI cross connection Enter Two way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI SEC Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure l 150 e Cross Connections From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The cross connection must be established in the Add direction In other
200. ilable by calling 1 800 225 4672 Lucent Technologies toll free hotline number The hotline is staffed with technical representatives and is operational 24 hours a day seven days a week Consult your Lucent Technologies account representative for complete customer service and maintenance information Also available for Network Element technical assistance is the Regional Technical Assistance Center RTAC at 1 800 225 RTAC RTAC personnel troubleshoot field problems 24 hours a day over the phone and if necessary on site CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Introduction e 5 Troubleshooting To resolve any problems that may occur while working with CPro 2000 refer to the CPro 2000 Software Release Description SRD that accompanies this manual or refer to the Readme file in the CPro 2000 software To access the Readme file select CPro 2000 R11 0 from the Start Menu then choose CPro 2000 R11 0 Readme from the submenu The Troubleshooting sections of both the SRD and Readme file contain specific information for resolving issues It is recommended therefore that you review these prior to requesting customer assistance System Requirements 6 e Introduction Hardware CPro 2000 R11 0 requires the following minimum hardware requirements e Intel Pentium processor at 133 MHz with 64 MB of Random Access Memory RAM and one available buffered COM port e CD drive e hard disk drive with at least 40 MB of available space after Windows
201. iles Cross Reference Tables for CPro 2000 Backup Restore Commands The following tables provide a cross reference between the CPro 2000 Backup Restore command parameters and the supported network element releases For more information on the commands used in backup and restore see the Lucent Technologies User Service Manual for the appropriate network element release CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 333 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table System ent sys for FiberReach with TL1 Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions __ 3 0 3 1 4 0 X X rtrv sys new tid rnestat almgrp agne co rt idle state tmout porttype echo baudrate Ko x Ko x x x x AK KK KK KR KK XK aa a Ga P S F uap X X X Om o oO Me mee ee S e msgtype X X Sooo o Comm ent ulsdcc 13 ent ulsdcc l4 334 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters rtrv ulsdcc 3 rtrv ulsdcc l4 x KK KK MK KK KK KK KK XK l3org I3res I3rd l3area 131v21s l4tlif l4tItm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm KK KK MK KK KK KK KK RK x KKK KR RIK KK KK KK KK RK CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Comm ent ulsdcc 14 rtrv ulsdcc l4 Comm ent ulsdcc l4 rtrv ulsdcc 14 Parameter 3 0 3 1 4 0 l4ajnsap Specia
202. ill operate during an active session The CPRO INI file can be customized for your computing environment after installing the CPro 2000 software NOTE Modifications to CPro 2000 will take effect only after a new CPro session is started following changes to the CPRO INI file Customizing the CPRO INI File The CPRO INI file contains the CPro 2000 default settings To access this file do the following From the Start button select Programs Click CPro 2000 R11 0 in the submenu that appears then click CPRO INI in the next submenu The CPRO INI file appears in a Windows Notepad editor window Each of the entries in this file can be customized for your environment They include the following e FILENAME This section contains the default script file name SCRIPT identifies the default data communications script file to be used for login for example DEFAULT SCR NOTE Automatic updating of the SCRIPT field in the Login dialog box is a feature of the CPRO INI file If a script name other than the one defined in the CPRO INI file is entered in the Login window the CPRO INI file is automatically updated to contain this new script file name If no script file name is used on the Login window then the CPRO INI file is updated to not contain a default script file name e CPRODRV This section contains entries that determine AUI parameters TIMEOUT is the amount of time in milliseconds between CPro 2000 sending a command a
203. ion TID F6 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example for an OC 3 slot pair 2a and 2b for 1 1 protection CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 F6 4 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 0 The following example represents a one way STS 1 1 1 protected OC 3 cross connection created by using the same procedure described above for a one way STS 3 1 1 protected OC 3 cross connection F6 4 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 0 NOTE The protection X Conns are entered automatically by the NE if the 1 1 provisioning already exists If the 1 1 provisioning is entered after the cross connection is created the NE automatically enters the protection cross connection CPro 2000 displays the protection cross connection the next time the cross connections are updated CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 141 Enter STS 1 Drop and Continue Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter VT1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cro
204. ion parameter in the Provision menu must be set to for the Add Drop Primary and Secondary nodes in the ring For shelves equippped with 29G OLIUs the Function Slot C fn c must be equipped with a 22 type OLIU The STS3 C feature must be enabled for each node in the ring This feature is enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command and in TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details On a DDM 2000 OC3 shelf equipped with the 29G OLIU CPro 2000 R11 0 supports setting the OC 3 line application parameter to 0x1 ee ee OC 1z mb gt mbes me 1 mb ociz Oc iz 3 mbi yb mb ki mb 2 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Add Drop Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low speed slot C 3 Select the low speed slot for the Add Drop node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click OK The following screen appears Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Add Drop node information you have selected CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 265 Enter End To End Path gt pei ocis 3 mbi Fub mb tir mike OC 1z 2 5 At the bottom of the f
205. ions Options from the GUI Procedure 1 Start CPro 2000 and from the GUI Access menu choose New Subnetwork The Login dialog box displays 2 Inthe Login dialog box highlight DEFAULT SCR at the bottom and delete it if DEFAULT SCR displays in the script field The Options button then becomes enabled NOTE The communication settings specified in the default script file will overwrite the current communication settings To ensure that the settings chosen manually either through the AUI or GUI are not overwritten remove the file named DEFAULT SCR from the Script field of the Login dialog box 3 Click Options The following screen appears 28 e CPro 2000 Startup CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Communications Options mecuti not connected M 4 Direct Connect is the default setting Choose Dial to Connect if a modem is being used Click OK 5 Click the Port Settings tab in the Communications Options window The following screen appears Communications Options 6 Verify that the settings are correct for your PC environment If not using the down arrow lists beside each option choose the correct settings such as Communications Port and Baud Rate Click OK If a modem is being used to connect click the Modem Commands tab in the Communications Options window The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 29 Communications Options a T Pa pe Hayes Compatible
206. is enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command supported by CPro and in TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details e The OC 3 Lines application in the Provision menu must be set to video NOTE When choosing the source and destination slots for the cross connection be sure to use the STS 3 slots that is click and drag to the larger boxes rather than the smaller STS 1 slots contained within them 2 The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties Ei 3 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the Video Sink cross connection icon right icon from the toolbar 4 Click OK and the following screen appears 136 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter ideo Sink F From 5 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 6 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following
207. is window 4 Change parameters as follows 298 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 To change A user name he Name field Type the new name in the selected field A phone or PIN number he Phone PIN field select the existing information then type the replacement The alarm level a different alarm option in the Alarm Level section An pager type he correct pager type in the Address Type section 5 From within the Call List page click OK to save the current settings and exit the Alarm Preferences dialog box or click Close exit the dialog box without saving any settings Deleting call list entries To delete call list entries 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab to display the call list page 3 Select an entry you want removed from the list NOTE Choosing either a name or phone number removes all data associated with that entry from the list 4 Click Delete The following confirmation message box appears ALARH Do you really want to delete this entry Cancel 5 Click OK to delete the entry or click Cancel to withdraw the command 6 Click OK save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings lil The Providers Tab This is a read only tab that displays the name and phone number of th
208. isionable parameters of a node to a file Files created during a backup are used during the Restore command In addition to other parameters CPro 2000 R11 0 supports the following new parameters in files that are backed up using the Backup command e The PDIPSW parameter dictates system reaction to a payload defect If PDIPSW is disabled no switching occurs in the event of a payload effect If PDISW is enabled switching occurs with a minor alarm when a payload defect is detected e The EQPDEPRPT parameter sets the scope of the Equipage Dependent Reports Parameter can be set so the reports contain either all pre provisioning information or information based on equipage e The PJC threshold parameter the count of the STS n pointer adjustments created or absorbed by an NE This happens when there is a difference in frame rates of the CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu e 91 incoming and outgoing SONET signals Excessive PJCs indicate network synchronization problems See Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters for more details NOTE Only CPro 2000 R7 0 R8 0 R9 0 R10 0 R11 0 backup files can be restored in CPro 2000 R11 0 The Restore feature for FT 2000 R8 1 supports only files that have been created using CPro 2000 Releases 9 0 10 0 and 11 0 See Appendix F Table of NE releases per CPro releases for more information about the compatibility between NEs and CPro 2000 releases Procedure 1 After
209. isioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 163 Provisioning OC 3 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and FiberReach Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 3 Lines The following OC 3 Provisioning dialog box displays for DDM 2000 OC 3 Release 15 0 OC 3 Line Provisioning Enter O 3 Option Parameters Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold Anplicatior ee The following OC 3 provisioning dialog box displays for FiberReach Release 4 0 OC 3 Line Provisioning Enter O 3 Option Parameters l Line Address AIS Alarm axe NOTE To provision an OC 3 Line from FiberReach shelf the shelf must be equipped with a 28G circuit pack The following OC 3 provisioning dialog box displays for DDM 2000 OC 12 ring releases only 164 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 OC 3 Line Provisioning Enter O 3 Option Parameters Line Address Applicator ALS Alarm Line State OC 3 Line Provisioning a Enter O 3 Option Parameters Line Aid AU 4 Mapping Alarm Severity Signal Degrade Threshold OCS Protection from OFF OC3 Protection from OC49 NOTE For more information on how to provision OC 3 Lines from an FT 2000 see the Provisioning OC 48 Line Options FT 2000 OC 48 section of this chapter 2 Choose a line
210. isplays specified cross connections in the current Shift F8 Network Element View View Hide X conn Hides all cross connections in the current Network Element View View Subnetwork View Opens a window displaying the Subnetwork View View Report Viewer Enables a previously saved report to be viewed or F12 printed Report Path Creates a report in the Report Viewer that contains information about the complete and incomplete paths in the subnetwork Subnetwork View only Report Timeslot Usage Creates a report in the Report Viewer that shows which time slots are being used in all NEs in the subnetwork Subnetwork View only Report Cross Connections Creates a report in the Report Viewer that shows the cross connections in a single NE from a Network Element View or for all inventoried NEs in a subnetwork from the Subnetwork View Report Map Displays a report in the Report Viewer that contains connectivity information in relation to the current node Network Element View only Report Alarms Displays an alarm summary in the Report Viewer for the current node in the Network Element View Report History Displays a history of events in the Report Viewer for the current node in the Network Element View MML only Report Equipment Displays a report in the Report Viewer that shows the equipage for the current node Network Element View only CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Task Mapping e 63 Menu Item Keyboard sho
211. ithout threshold for the system to restore only non provisionable threshold parameters e Select restore only thresholds for the system to restore only provisionable threshold parameters 3 Select the desired option then click OK to perform the restore Click No to cancel the restore If you choose to continue the following screen displays Cio Ai A11 0 96 e The Edit Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 4 Click Yes to continue the process The following report displays tmprep_tmp CPro 2000 Restore Preparation Report for OC12 2 DOM 2000 0 12 Rv August 30 2000 10 18 Equipage Differences No equipment differences were found between the backup file and the network element Hardware switch Setting Differences Mo hardware switch setting differences were found between the backup file and the network element Login Names from the backup file NOTE CPro 2000 sends commands to discover the current equipage and hardware switch settings in the selected NE and compares this information with the corresponding information in the existing backup file The above report is generated to display any differences that are found 5 Click the Close button to close the report The following screen appears CPro 2000 R11 0 x NOTE To ensure the success of the restore operation CPro 2000 to removes existing cross connections and feature data as they might conflict with the restore commands After
212. ivate the fields The new window should look like this 296 e The Alarms Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 4 In the Name field type a name associated with the pager number NOTE It is recommended that you type a name in the Name field if one pager number is associated with one person However you can leave the Name field blank if more than one person is responsible for monitoring the pager gt 6 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The following message box appears if you do not enter a name in the Name field To proceed without an entry click OK In the Phone PIN field type the pager number using the format dashes are optional 000 0000 PIN Pager Identification Number This is a required field the system will not permit you to proceed until you type a phone number in this field If you attempt to proceed without entering a phone PIN number in this field the following warning appears The Alarms Menu e 297 ALARM AN Must Enter Ein 8 Inthe Address Type section select the appropriate pager type Click l way for a one way pager and 2 way for a two way pager 9 Inthe Alarm Level section select the desired alarm level to be associated with the pager number The option are Critical Major Minor or None Selecting None excludes an entry from search list The number is not called if a network alarm is detected but the entry remains in the Call List Important It is recommended
213. ividual as well as ranges of cross connections may be entered and deleted using drag and drop methods NOTE If you attempt to enter a cross connection by selecting a source and dragging the cross connection to a destination and no cross connection is established your destination is probably incorrect Check the validity of your cross connection addresses In this situation CPro 2000 generates an error message in the status bar For more specific details on creating cross connections see the individual procedures in this chapter associated with each of the following cross connection types e One way FT 2000 e Two way e Drop and Continue DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 supported ring releases e One way DRI FT 2000 e Two way DRI FT 2000 e Two way DRI PRI FT 2000 e Two way DRI SEC FT 2000 e Multi drop FT 2000 e Locked DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach e Dual 0x1 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach e Single 0x1 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 123 e Video Source DDM 2000 OC 12 e Video Sink DDM 2000 OC 12 e Hairpin DDM 2000 OC 3 Creating Ranges of Cross Connections In CPro 2000 you can create a range of VT1 5 cross connections in DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach NEs The range of allowable cross connections can consist of a contiguous group of addresses or a noncontiguous group of addresses e Tocreate a contiguous range of cross connections select the starting
214. k View and the Network Element Views in any of the following ways Note that menu items change depending on which part of the GUI has the focus e The Node Manager is available from the Access menu and the toolbar Use the Open Close and Switch To commands to switch the focus between the Network Element Views and the Subnetwork View The Node Manager contains other commands such as Login Logout Partition Inventory Partition Map and Set Access See the Node Manager section in the The Access Menu chapter for further details NOTE The command button functionality in the Node Manager varies according to the type of icon highlighted Therefore the buttons will become enabled or disabled accordingly e Clicking on the title bar of an open window either a Network Element View or the Subnetwork View changes the focus of the GUI to that window e While in the Subnetwork View double clicking on an NE node opens its Network Element View The focus of the GUI is then switched from the Subnetwork View to the open Network Element View e While in a Subnetwork View you can rearrange the NE and partition icons by dragging them with the cursor The NE icons that appear in the Enter End to End Path dialog box can be moved in the same way e Clicking the right mouse button on a partition icon in the Subnetwork View brings up a pop up menu containing the following commands Open Partition Update Map Update Inventory End To End Path Reports
215. l Conditions Manual Adjacency TARP Data Cache l4ajorg l4ajres l4ajrd l4ajarea l4ajsys l4tdctid l4tdcnsap l4etdc l4tdctid l4tdcorg l4tdcres l4tdcrd l4tdcarea l4tdcsys x KK KM KM x KK KK KM MK ps x KK KM KM MK x KK KK KM MK p lt x KK KM KM x KK KK OM MK p lt w e e e cil 8 3 side D D a R FFE dslpm set attr alm rtrv attr alm x syncnmode syncfunction sync auto config almdel clrdel pmn ntfcnde almmsg almtype e AD all aa Ko x x x x x KK i EEE set attr cont rtrv attr cont conttype RT only x x x CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 335 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Port amp Line ent t1 rtrv tl linecde ntfcncde bpv ais sfthr pmmd fmt pst Port amp Line rtrv t3 ntfcncde With DS3 in fn slots ais Port amp Line rtrv oc12 sfthr vimr mode Port amp Line rtrv oc3 Port amp Line rtrv ocl fmt pmmd Channel rtrv crs vtl Channel rtrv crs sts 1 frame k linecode 336 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 0S pbit xbit pst sfthr If main slots are syncmsg equipped with 29G aisnc dccmode sfthr If main slots are syncmsg equipped with 28G aisnc dccmode aisncsa alsnc pst Dauna his III a slasslatelods aianecakanaialtal n icici a ca c
216. l Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 205 Main Main I There are special cross connections for the parent ring of a DDM 2000 parent ring called dual and single 0x1 cross connections These cross connections only exist in the parent ring never in the child ring A single 0x1 cross connection puts the signal on one rotation in the parent ring A dual 0x1 cross connection puts the signal on both rotations of the parent ring NOTE To create a Ring Transport Service path in a DDM 2000 OC 12 as differentiated from a regular two endpoint path the OC 3 line application parameter must be set to 0x in all of the nodes in the parent ring This parameter is set using the Provisioning Menu There is no special parameter setting in order to create a Ring Transport Service path in a DDM 2000 OC 3 or FT 2000 OC 48 parent ring 206 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter a VT1 5 Two way Ring Transport Service End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 3 FiberReach and DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U or 29G OLIU circuit pack NOTE The following restrictions must be met to create a VT1 5 Ring Transport Service path and not a regular two way path e Only the FiberReach ring can be the child ring e A low speed slot of the add drop nodes must contain a 27 type OLIU circuit pack Procedure 1 From the Subnetwork View select the End to End Path pull down menu or click the right mouse butt
217. lay how the node is currently configured SET SECURITY Port Provisioning Enter SET SECURITY Option Parameters Address Baud Rate Echo Security Time out min n NOTES e Available parameters depend on settings for Address and Port Type For example The Baud Rate and Echo parameters are unavailable when the Port Type is set to CIT The Security parameter is also unavailable when the Port Type is set to TL1 e A Port Type of CIT indicates MML e Only one port can be configured for TL1 at any given time e For FiberReach Release 4 0 the Address value dcc all is not a valid option for TL1 3 Use the down arrow lists to select the options appropriate for the node you are configuring 4 To change the interface language click the Port Type down arrow then select the desired mode CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 189 190 e The Provision Menu SET SECURITY Port Provisioning x Enter SET SECURITY Option Parameters f Address Port Type Baud Rate Echo Security Time out min A 5 Click Set Value to activate the new security options CAUTION Clicking on Set Values after changing the Port Type parameter causes the NE to reset This temporarily halts the communication between CPro 2000 and the NE CPro 2000 displays a series of message boxes describing the situation Carefully read and follow the instructions in each message box When the reset complete click OK in the dialo
218. le script file allows the user to access the communications port on the PC and then stops Listed below is a detailed explanation of each line in the script file e settings com1 9600 e 7 1 none This line is usually the first line of any script file It indicates which line communicates with the subnetwork com1 is the communications port on the PC that is used to connect the NE 9600 indicates that the communications are at 9 6 Kbps e indicates that the parity is even 7 indicates that there are 7 data bits 1 indicates that there is 1 stop bit none indicates that there is no handshaking e connect This line causes the AUI to access the communications port identified in the settings command using the speed parity data and stop bit information provided e if connect fail This line allows the user to define what happens if the AUI is unable to connect to the communications port on the PC e user msg Could not connect to COM1 exit The open and close brackets are used with any command that begins with if The brackets always stand alone on a line as shown above In this case the brackets indicate that execution of the commands between the brackets is optional The commands between the brackets are executed only if no connection is made If the connection attempt is successful the next command following the brackets is executed in this example the end command The command user
219. log box you are prompted to choose a locked add drop node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 3 Select the low speed slot for this locked add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click OK The following screen appears 246 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 zal a 5 Select the Ring ID The Ring ID establishes which way the pass through cross connections which are between the locked cross connections should be created It also determines on which side the locked cross connections leave an NE Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected 6 You are prompted to choose the next add drop node Double click the desired node The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 247 7 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click OK The main end to end path form appears 8 You are prompted to choose another node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click OK The following screen appears
220. lowing screen appears Delete End to End Path Delete End To End Path Operation successfully completed Click OK The End to End Path menu also enables you to correct the LocA and or LocZ values of an FT 2000 OC 48 STS 3 or STS 1 path Use this command if you find LocA and or LocZ errors in your Path Provisioning Error report When you use the Modify LocA LocZ command CPro 2000 determines what the correct LocA and LocZ values should be and adjusts the values accordingly See the Lucent Technologies FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual for further details on path provisioning errors Procedure l Z 284 e The End to End Path Menu From the End to End Path menu choose Modify LocA LocZ The following path listing displays Modify Loca Locz F6 4 sts3 le 5 _ F6 4_sts3 1e 13 AOInTOMmation Tributary 4 Source TID F6 2 Destination TID F6 3 List of cross connections 5 TID F6 2 Source Aid ls 4a Destination Aid sts3 1e 4 0NEWAY LOCZ F6 TID F6 3 Source Aid st 3 1 w 4 Destination Aid ls 4a 0NEWAY LOCA F6 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 NOTE When the Audit On box is checked the alarm feature that notifies the user of any signal problem is activated To turn off this feature click the box to remove the check mark 3 Select the path you want to update from the List of Path Names field Each path name consists of the source TID and tributary of the path The Path Information box displays
221. ly available from the Network Element View Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Logout 2 Ifthe NE that you want to logout of is TL1 connected or not a local node it is not the node to which you logged into when you connected to the subnetwork you are logged out of the node and the Network Element View is closed if it is the local node 3 Ifthe NE is MML connected and is the local node the node to which you logged into when connecting to the subnetwork the following dialog box appears CPro 2000 R11 0 x 4 Click Yes to log out of the local node and any other open Network Element Views including the Subnetwork View Click No if you do not want to logout of the local node and close any open windows Node Manager 78 e The Access Menu Purpose To provide easy access to the subnetwork you are logged into and its components such as partitions and individual NEs The Node Manager allows you to open and close the Subnetwork View and Network Elements Views You can expand a partition to show all of its individual NEs perform a partition map or partition inventory rename a partition or open close a partition You can also log into NEs log out of NEs and preset user IDs and passwords from this window NOTE The command button functionality in the Node Manager varies according to the type of icon highlighted Therefore the buttons will become enabled or disabled accordingly CPro 2000 User Manual Releas
222. ly available from the Subnetwork View The Path report only analyzes paths within an individual ring The Partition Inventory command must be completed before creating a Path report As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report NOTE All hairpin cross connections will be listed as paths Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Path A report similar to the following appears Path Report X For Partition P 2 Thie partition contate 2 DDM 2000 00 3 netaork elementis Path Name m 2 2 3 VIL SHC OC3 Ii SHC OC3 E oie E SHC OC3 W WAY b 2 3 3 a Dangling cross connections in this Partition Network Element SNC OC3 M DDATL 2000 OC 3 R13 50 S131 CROSS CONNECTIONS sa 1 4 view Page I of 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu e 111 Cross Connections Purpose When chosen from the Subnetwork View the cross connections report shows the cross connections for all NEs in the partition that have been inventoried When chosen from a Network Element View this report shows the cross connections for that NE only As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report Procedure 1 From the Re
223. mote node in the local node s Ctrl L subnetwork NE View only Access Logout Logs out of the current node NE View Only Ctrl O Access Node Manager Opens closes logs in logs out or switches to each Ctrl N Network Element View Can also be used for a partition inventory partition map or renaming a partition Access Run Batch Commands Executes a series of commands using a batch file Ctrl B Access Open Partition Opens the selected partition Subnetwork View only Access Close Partition Closes the selected open partition Subnetwork View only Ctrl E Available only if the Subnetwork View is closed Access Exit Exits the CPro 2000 application see n Edit Backup Backs up equipage cross connections and F8 provisionable parameters of the current node to a file Edit Restore Restores equipage cross connections and or F9 provisionable parameters from a file to the current node Edit Change TID Changes the TID of the current NE 62 e Task Mapping CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Menu Item Task Keyboard shortcut Edit Change Password Changes the password of the current NE Edit Switch DRI Operates or releases the manual dual ring interworking DRI switch for an FT 2000 OC 48 customized name of your choice Hides or shows the status bar at the bottom of the Ctrl R GUI showing the alarm status View Toolbar Hides or shows the toolbar at the top of the GUI eas uaea D
224. mptible Protection Access NPPA is a feature in FT 2000 OC 48 that allows the protection tributaries to serve as non preemptible unprotected service tributaries while the CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 corresponding service tributaries become unprotected FT 2000 is capable of handling NPPA at the STS 1 tributaries level The NE views for FT 2000 OC 48 are designed to display the NPPA status of the high speed tributaries The following color conventions are used to display the NPPA status e Yellow on the lower half of the high speed tributaries the normal service tributaries indicates that the tributary is unprotected e Yellow on the upper half of the high speed tributaries the normal protection tributaries indicates that the tributary is in service without any protection and is non preemptible This scheme applies to both STS 1 level and STS 3 level NPPA statuses In the case of STS 3 all four slots pertaining to an STS 3 level tributary which includes an STS 3 slot as well as three corresponding STS 1 slots will turn yellow at the same time There will not be NPPA status at levels lower than STS 3 In the case of STS 1 individual STS 1 slots have their own NPPA status If any one of the STS 1 slots is not NPPA enabled the corresponding STS 3 slot is shown as NPPA disabled Only if all three of the STS 1 slots that correspond to an STS 3 tributary are NPPA enabled will the corresponding STS 3 slot be shown as NPPA enabled C
225. msg prints a message to the screen indicating to the user that the connection attempt was unsuccessful The text in quotation marks following this command is displayed on the GUI window until the user clicks on the OK button in the message box 328 e Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Rele The exit command causes the script file to stop e end This line indicates to CPro 2000 that there are no more lines in the script file to be executed and that the login process can now begin Batch Files Batch files are similar to script files The same commands used in a script file are often found in a batch file but are used in different ways Examples of how batch files are used include the following e installation commands necessary for a technician to do a rapid turnup of a network element including any initialization tasks e a group of commands that may or may not be supported by CPro 2000 The batch file allows a user to do many commands by executing one file such as polling the subnetwork twice a day and displaying an NE alarm report at each node Troubleshooting Script and Batch Files The following paragraphs contain useful information for creating and using script or batch files General Problems Although timing problems are the most common users should be aware of other types of script or batch file problems e incorrect port settings login IDs and passwords e syntax problems such as missing br
226. n Map or Partition Inventory from the Login window CPro 2000 automatically attempts to logs into each of the NEs in the subnetwork The following window appears during CPro 2000 s the first login attempt into one of the NEs in the subnetwork Type in the correct user ID and password and then click OK TID SNC OCRE UserlD Password CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 31 32 e CPro 2000 Startup Note For convenience you can preset the user ID and password for each node in a mixed ring using the Set Access feature in the Node Manager For instructions on how to use this feature see the Node Manager section in The Access Menu chapter 7 Click OK After the login process the CPro 2000 GUI window that appears displays the appropriate NE View li Connecting to an NE Using a Login Script Use this type of connection when the PC running CPro 2000 is directly connected to the CIT port of an NE Each NE has two CIT ports one for data communications equipment DCE port in front and one for data terminal equipment DTE port in back If you are using the DCE CIT port for access the PC can be directly connected If you are using the DTE CIT port for access a null modem must be used to directly connect to the PC COM port See the appropriate NE User Service Manual for instructions on selecting the modem and settings for your COM port Procedure The following procedure explains how to ac
227. n and one address must be a low speed slot e For DDM 2000 OC 3 the low speed slot must contain a BBF2B MXRVO circuit pack a BBG19 circuit pack or a 26G2 U circuit pack For DDM 2000 OC 1 the low speed slot must contain a DS1 circuit pack CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 131 2 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the locked cross connection icon from toolbar icon with single arrow pointing to the left NOTE The ring direction for the cross connection is specified according to which high speed side is involved when establishing the cross connection m1 side versus m2 side 3 Click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter X Enter Locked From m 2 f 1 To a 6 4 Ring Direction mi Caution Execution of this command may affect service 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example le SNC OC3J DDM 2000 OC 3 R130 a HH T l ie NOTE A locked cross connection takes up an entire time slot in the NE although the cross connection does not actually pass through the time slot in both mains As shown in the sample above the time slot m2 7 2 is grayed out even though it
228. n from the NE and transfers this information to the GUI The GUI then presents the information in a graphical display The CPro 2000 GUI allows you to execute tasks on the subnetwork or on specific NEs in the subnetwork by selecting commands from the menus and objects from the graphical display Tasks that normally require typing several long ASCII interface commands can be accomplished with a few mouse clicks in the GUI You can use the AUI for commands that are unsupported by the GUI Although the AUI can be used to talk directly to the subnetwork by typing commands do this with caution Changes made to the subnetwork via the AUI are not reflected in the GUI unless the CPro 2000 Update Inventory command or Update X Conn command for cross connections is performed Your GUI and AUI can become unsynchronized or the data in your subnetwork can become inconsistent with the data in CPro 2000 See the Using the Interfaces Together section in this chapter for more information on keeping the user interfaces synchronized and consistent CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 39 Using the Interfaces Together The GUI and AUI work together in CPro 2000 Both are necessary for successful operation of the system The AUI accepts commands from the GUI and forwards them to the NE The AUI then accepts the response from the NE and passes that information onto the GUI for storage or presentation Communication with the subnetwork is
229. nc 0C3 LOS status Hi f61 HA 82 64 cre CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The following sample AUI screen shows MML output from a DDM 2000 NE when connection is over TCP IP CPro 2000 A11 0 AUI Connected to 135 13 196 186 Network Edit Capture Help all COMELCO Connection Report th JL b I m l l z mll m l il ti The following sample AUI screen shows TL1 output from a DDM 2000 NE when connection is over TCP IP through an NCC CPro 2000 A11 0 AUI Connected to 135 12 42 56 Network Edit Capture Help jaa e 7IP 1015 oc3a 7 00 09 06 m 1015 Tere ede f RTRV CRS STS3C C IP 1016 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 55 56 e The User Interfaces The following sample AUI screen shows TL1 output from an FT 2000 NE when connection is via serial link File it Yew UTE IMAMUnI ators Lt Help OC48 3 BB BH8 30 B9 237 55 1614 COMPLD Wipe lal sal Sie VetLei le 13 4 5 stsi le 14 1 stsi le 14 2 stsi Lle 14 3 5TRY Heipel ala alaj al sts1 Lle 15 2 ACT etsi Lle 15 3 ACT stsi 1e 16 1 ACT TEMPORARY OTHER stsi Lle 16 2 ACT stsi Lle 16 3 ACT cre The user can benefit from the AUI by using it as a dumb terminal connected to an NE Any functionality that is not yet available in CPro 2000 can be accessed through expert mode which consists of clicking in the AUI window and typing t
230. nd FiberReach beginning with DDM 2000 Release 15 0 and FiberReach Release 4 0 For OC 12 the DCE and DTE ports use MML and the X 25 ports use TL1 CPro 2000 supports both of these For FT the DCE and DTE ports can be set to CIT or TL1 CPro 2000 supports only TL1 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach Access via CIT Port For DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 users establishing a connection to your SONET subnetwork for operations with CPro 2000 is similar to accessing your SONET subnetwork for operations CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 23 Partitioning 24 e CPro 2000 Startup with an ASCII terminal Like an ASCII terminal the COM port of the PC running CPro 2000 can be connected to the craft interface terminal CIT port of a node in your subnetwork FT 2000 OC 48 Access via CIT Port FT 2000 users must have their CIT port either DCE located in front or DTE located in back provisioned to be a TL1 interface to use CPro 2000 Use the FT 2000 PC CIT command security set security port DCE DTE to provision the CIT port as a TL1 interface Use one of the following methods to provision the port back to a PC CIT non TL1 port when you have completed your CPro 2000 session e Using CPro 2000 select Set CID Secu from the Provision pull down menu and follow the procedure detailed in The Provision Menu chapter of this document e From the FT 2000 OC 48 PC CIT use the FT 2000 PC CIT command security set security port to ch
231. nd no changes are made to the cross connection Delete a Cross Connection Procedure l 3 4 From the Network Element View click the cross connection line you wish to delete Either press Delete on your keyboard or drag the cross connection line to the trash can icon located in the bottom right corner of the GUI The following screen appears asking you to confirm the cross connection deletion Confirm Cross Connection Delete ix sts1 1w 8 3 To sts1 1le 8 3 Source TID SNC FT D Destination TID SNC FT D Caution Execution of this command may affect service Click Yes and the following screen appears Warming Please Confirm four Action Ei Are you sure you want to delete the Cross Connection between sts1 1w 8 3 and sts1 1e 8 37 Select Ho to skip deleting this Cross Connection Click Yes to delete the cross connection NOTE If the cross connection to be deleted is part of an end to end path the following dialog box displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 157 CPro 2000 R7 0 x Would you hke to DELETE the F6 4_sts3 1e 6 End To End Path Yes Delete the entre F6 4_sts3 1e 6 End To End Path Ho Delete only the selected cross connection but not the entire F6 4 sts3 1e 6 End lo End Path Cancel Don t delete anything Hote Deletion of any part of an End To End Path will cause the entire path to be removed from the End To End category and all remaining par
232. nd path form displays EnterEnd ToEndPath sssi i sSsSSsisi sCsiaS 10 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path x 262 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 11 You may click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes The following message box displays Enter End To End Path 12 Click OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path dialog box to complete the process The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 R6 2 GUI 0C3 3 DDM 2000 OC 3 R11 1 2 Enter an STS 3C Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available to select unsupported signal rates and path types for your current subnetwork are grayed out Click the STS3C and 3 Node Intwk tabs NOTE In order for the STS 3C path type to be available the following restrictions must be followed CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 263 264 e The End to End Path Menu A low speed slot in the Add Drop Primary and Secondary nodes must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack The OC 3 Lines applicat
233. nd the time it takes the NE to respond before CPro 2000 times out For example 30000 equals 30 seconds 100000 equals 100 seconds and 1000 equals 1 second This parameter should be increased when circumstances such as a very large network or slow response of the NE are causing CPro 2000 to time out The default setting for this feature is 60000 60 seconds SETTINGS contains the PC settings in the following format port name baud rate parity data bits stop bits handshaking COM1 9600 e 7 I none is an example of the PC settings where COM1 is the name of the port connected to an NE for use with CPro 2000 NOTE The settings listed in your default data communications script in most cases it is DEFAULT SCR supersede the setting information listed in the CPRO INI file LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM are the entries that determine the size of the AUI screen These entries are saved from the last use of the AUI The default settings are as follows Left 0 Top 380 Right 640 Bottom 480 CPro 2000 User Manual Rele CPROGUI This section contains entries that determine the size of the GUI window LEFT TOP WIDTH and HEIGHT are the entries determining the size of the GUI screen and are saved from the last use of the GUI The default settings are as follows Left 0 Top 0 Width 1200 Height 6500 PREFERENCE This section contains entries that determine how cross connections are viewed in a
234. ned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Provisioning OC 1 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 1 Lines The following OC 1 Provisioning dialog box displays for DDM 2000 OC 1 Line Provisioning Enter O 1 Option Parameters Line Address gnal Degrade Threshold Alarm Level OC 1 Line Provisioning Enter OC 1 Option Parameters 0 Line Address Signal Degrade Threshold 2 Choose a line address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the line address box A list of all OC 1 line addresses for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a line address is chosen click Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update values use the down arrow list at eac
235. ng CPro 2000 Settings ooeeeeneneennnnenenennnssnsnnsssesssserssessrrresrrereresereresereresreerereesene 16 CPRO TINT FANG ss a A E EE E ENA scars 16 ENN MINT TIG E OT onne A E A T E E E 18 Ws se eae 5 Celie TaD eena n E 18 Ws The Com Port Delauhts 1B cai crescesseccomeses doncacesostauaccssaussevesseeausesaeceyuedvereaceatecceues 19 Ts The Transparency Ta Denonin n Ee 20 w WS A Tar E 2 CPro 2000 Startup 23 ODE Wy E IIE EE AAA N EAA EEE N E EA EE 23 PEs rcal OMNIA CNS earne E A AA E E OA EA 23 DDM 2000 OC 3 OC 12 and FiberReach Access via CIT Pott cccceeee 23 FT 2000 OC 48 Access via CIT Port ccccccccccessssssseeeecccceceeeeeeeeaeasseeeeeececeeeeeeeeeaas 24 DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 Access via X 25 Port cccccccccssssseeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeaas 24 FI 2000 OC 48 Access via X25 POM ais vecsvcsssccasionsvesasencceasccdnesaxesessviessavensbeaveodonsavess 24 FibetReach ACCESS via 20 POr esiet EE SENA EE E 24 Par ON e es Ren ne E E A A ee 24 The Pariton VenO senan a a S A TOEP Gon Naaa E A Seem ts RC Nees een aT eee te eae 27 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Contentse i ii e Contents B N OE a T E 2 Starine C Pro 2000 sasira aa a a 28 Accessing the MIN OT esate ects seincten cnc iana ADEE EEEa 28 Selecting Communications Options from the GUI cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 Selecting Communications Options from the AUL cccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 Connecting to an NE via S
236. ng End to End Paths Access Ring Application A form in the CPro 2000 End to End Path menu supports the creation of a three node interworking end to end path which is often used for access ring applications The path is provisioned over an access ring that interconnects to another ring via two colocated pairs of nodes This type of arrangement allows the end to end path to survive multiple failures To create a three node interworking end to end path access the End to End Path menu while in the Subnetwork View A form appears prompting the selection of the signal rate and path type The selection of these two options dynamically changes the form to reflect the information needed to create that specific type of path There are two types of three node interworking end to end paths supported by CPro 2000 e STS 1 three node interworking DDM 2000 e VT1 5 three node interworking DDM 2000 OC 3 only NOTE CPro 2000 R11 0 does not support three node interworking end to end paths on an FT 2000 All low speed connections for DDM 2000 use the following packs e OC 3 or STS 1E The following procedures provide specific instructions on creating the four types of three node interworking end to end paths in an access ring application NOTE If the path being configured is a ring with linear extensions the path around the ring and the individual linear extension cross connections are created separately CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End
237. ng via TL1 you cannot type a new TID into the dialog box You must choose from the known TIDs from the saved subnetwork information 4 Continue with Step 2 in the New Subnetwork section earlier in this chapter to complete the login process Close Subnetwork Purpose To disconnect from a subnetwork that is currently being accessed Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select Close Subnetwork The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 73 CPro 2000 R11 0 4 Save Subnetwork Purpose Click No if you do not want to close the subnetwork Click Yes if you want to close the current subnetwork Note that this command does not completely exit you out of CPro 2000 see the Exit section later in this chapter The following screen displays CPro 2000 11 0 Click No if you do not want to save information about this subnetwork to a file Click Yes if you want to save this subnetwork s information to a file The following screen displays CPro 2000 11 0 Q e Click NO to keep the Com Port open to facilitate further connections Click Yes if you want to disconnect the Com Port To save a subnetwork s information to a file so that you can restart your next CPro 2000 session using the current subnetwork s information Use this command when you already have a file for this subnetwork s information and you want to update the file Procedure l 74 e The Acc
238. nnections individually Click Yes to All if you want to establish all the cross connections in the multi drop Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 6 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 153 l F6 1 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 1 The following example represents a one way STS 1 multi drop cross connection created by using the same procedure described earlier for a one way STS 3 multi drop cross connection F6 1 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 1 Joj x 13 15 3 12 14 14 Change LocA and LocZ Values for an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 Double click the cross connection line whose LocA and or LocZ are to be changed 154 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 NOTE When two way or overlapping multiple cross connections exist the following screen appears first 0 Select the appropriate Cross Connection O x 2 Select the desired cross connection by clicking on the appropriate box Click OK 3 The following dialog box displays Change Loca Src_Aid sts1 1w 10 1 Dest Aid sts1 1e 10 1 Conn Cunent Loc SHC FET D Curen Loc SHC FT D NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem When
239. ns not reported via CR MJ and MN LEDs office alarms or parallel telemetry Or NR conditions not reported via CR MJ and MN alarms office alarms parallel telemetry or TL1 e Information Status center section information that is displayed depends on the task you are performing in the GUI Information on cross connections type address and signal rate and slot addresses change dynamically as your cursor moves to different locations in the GUI The information window also displays messages about in progress tasks e Trash can Icon right section is a receptacle for deleted cross connections You can select and drag a cross connection line source or destination to the trash can icon A cross connection deletion box appears confirming that you want to delete the cross connection See the Cross Connection Deletion section in the Cross Connections chapter for further details The Cancel Dialog Box To cancel an operation while in progress use the Cancel button While each command is being sent from CPro 2000 to the NEs a dialog box appears containing the Cancel button The text in the dialog box changes dynamically as the command progresses For example a CPro 2000 operation can consist of several NE commands which are sent through the AUI to the NE such as creating an end to end path The CPro 2000 end to end path command consists of the ENT CRS commands for each cross connection that is part of the path The
240. nsparency Advanced NE TYFE FiberReach DOM OCS DOM OCT 2 F T 2000 BASE RELEASE Hh CPro int Preferences NEW RELEASE th Cancel Enter the current release in the first field then enter the new release where indicated as shown in the example below Interface Settings Com Port Defaults Transparency Advanced NE Ty PE FiberReach DOM OCS DOM OCT 2 F T 2000 BASE RELEASE 4 0 NEW RELEASE 45 ii Cancel 4 Click OK to save the current settings to the INI file and dismiss the CPro ini CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 dialog box or click Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings Installation e 21 iv The Advanced Tab NOTE The Advanced tab is intended for troubleshooting and debugging purposes only Do not change its settings unless directed to do so by Customer Technical Support To get technical support for CPro 2000 call 1 800 225 4672 Lucent Technologies toll free hotline number The hotline 1s staffed with technical representatives and is operational 24 hours a day seven days a week To view the Advanced tab options 1 From the GUI click the Access menu then select Edit CPro ini The CPro ini Preferences dialog box appears with the Interface Settings tab displayed 2 Click the Advanced tab CPro ini Preferences WARNING Do not change the setting in this tab without consulting Customer Technical
241. nt cannot be used to go to a label outside the function definition e You can nest other functions calls within a function e Ifa TEMP EXIT is called from inside a function it searches for the exit label that appears before the start of the function call not from before its definition e Ifyou use lt or gt as part of your parameter you must precede them with a backslash Function Syntax A function definition appears as shown below FUNCTION function_name no_of_parameters executable function script lines the parameters are referenced by their order 0 the nth parameter is referenced as n a function does not return any value A function calling appears as shown below CALL function_name lt parameter list each enclosed in two lt gt s gt Function Example Shown below is an example of how a function can be used in a script or batch file A function can be used in all situations where a WAITFOR statement is going to be used In this example the function is handling the time spent waiting for a response from an NE 324 e Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0 FUNCTION WAITING 2 waitfor 1 itwaitfor fail user msg 2 exit The call to this sample function might look something like the following CALL WATTING lt DESTINATION gt lt Destination prompt not found gt Macros Macros provide the ability to put a variable into the
242. ntory Subnetwork View Purpose To retrieve the equipage cross connections and partition topology from all the nodes in the selected partition When the Update Inventory command is completed successfully the Subnetwork View is redisplayed This menu item is only available from the Subnetwork View Procedure 1 From the Update pull down menu select Update Inventory See the Partitioning section in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter for specific details on a Partition Inventory and its contents CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Update Menu e 195 196 e The Update Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Window Menu Overview The Window Menu allows the user to have a more flexible environment in which to use CPro 2000 This menu gives the user the capability of changing how the information is presented on the screen The Window Menu commands include the following features e Cascade e Tuile Horizontal e Tile Vertical e Arrange Icons e Window Toggle CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Window Menu e 197 Cascade Purpose To display the open windows on the CPro 2000 GUI in a cascade format Procedure 1 From the Window pull down menu select Cascade The open windows are displayed as shown in the following screen CPro 2000 R110 GUI OC3 13 DDH 2000 OC 3 R130 198 e The Window Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Releas
243. nual Release 11 0 The Network Element View Each Network Element View window contains a graphical representation of termination points and cross connection provisioning The following list details the Network Element View for each type of NE The Network Element View for DDM 2000 OC 3 contains termination points for individual STS 1 or DS3 signals or up to 28 VT1 5 or DS1 signals per STS 1 signal The Network Element View for DDM 2000 OC 3 equipped with 24G OLIU circuit pack contains termination points for individual STS 3 STS 1 or DS3 signals or up to 28 VT1 5 or DS1 signals per STS 1 signal The Network Element View for DDM 2000 OC 12 contains termination points for individual STS 1 DS3 or STS 3C signals The Network Element View for FiberReach contains termination points for up to 28 DS1 signals for 1x7 protection or 16 DS1 signals for 1x1 protection The Network Element View for FiberReach equipped with 28G U OLIU circuit pack in the mains and 22 type circuit pack in the function slots contains termination points for DS1 signals as well as termination points for STS 3 signals to function slots f 1 and f 2 The Network Element View for an FT 2000 OC 48 contains termination points for up to three STS 1 signals per STS 3 signal The arrangement of objects in the Network Element View follows these general guidelines For DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and FiberReach NEs The vertically stacked boxes on the left side corre
244. o Alarm Polling is disabled Auto Alarm Polling 288 e The Alarms Menu Purpose To enable or disable automatic updating of alarm status at specific time repeat intervals for the selected network element The Auto Alarm Polling feature is enabled when it is shown with a check If there is no check mark against the Auto Alarm Polling command then the feature is disabled The default setting for this feature is disabled You can change the auto alarm polling state from either the Alarms menu or by using the INI File Editor from the Access menu When the feature is enabled the polling interval defaults to the last saved setting CPro 2000 User Manual Rele The Auto Alarm Polling feature updates the alarm status for the node in view You must therefore ensure that the NE view is displayed on your monitor when this feature is enabled The default auto alarm polling interval is three minutes You can change this to a minimum of one minute and up to a maximum of 90 minutes using the Preferences option in the Alarm menu Change this interval using the INI File Editor from the Access menu or follow the instructions in the Preferences section of this chapter The interval in Auto Polling Minutes field overrides the corresponding values specified in the CPRO INI file The system writes and saves the values in the Auto Polling Minutes field into the CPRO INI file when you log out of CPro CPro 2000 uses these previously saved values when th
245. ode Click OK The main end to end path form displays 242 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 a 10 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter End To End Path You are prompted to choose another video sink node for creating a multi drop path or to create the end to end path When ready to create the path click OK The following screen appears Enter End To End Path Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path The End to End Path Menu e 243 CPro 2000 Release 4 03 01 6 16 96 DDK 2000 OC 12 OC12 4 Access Edit View Report Provision Update Window Conns Alarms Help sss DDM 2000 OC AA pom2000 0c12 ociz6 iA Locked Arc End to End Paths A Locked Arc path must be at the VT1 5 signal rate and is only applicable to DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach NEs A locked path provides a fixed path for signals that have rigid timing requirements A locked path contains locked cross connections which only transmit a signal to and receive a sign
246. ode as long as the equipage of the nodes and the NE software is compatible Equipage does not affect the restoration of an FT 2000 node The current node must be inventoried prior to using the Backup command You can inventory the current node during startup from the Update menu or from the Node Manager Purpose To restore provisionable options previously saved into a file via the Backup command See Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters for more details NOTE Only users with a privileged login can restore an NE An error message appears if a nonprivileged user attempts this command Only CPro 2000 R7 0 R8 0 R9 0 and R10 0 backup files can be restored in CPro 2000 R11 0 The Restore feature is intended to restore files that have been backed up with the same NE release and the same software release CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 e If you attempt to restore files that have been backed up using a different NE the following message window will be displayed CPro 2000 R11 0 x e Ifyou attempt to restore files that have been backed up using a different release of the same NE the following message window will be displayed CPro 2000 R11 0 x NOTE Although a backup file may be created remotely CPro 2000 Release 11 0 does not support a remote restore All TARP NE releases automatically restore commands However in DDM 2000 OC 3 Releases 13 0 13 5 and 15 x DDM 2000 OC 1
247. of line provisioning parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 175 OC 3 Line Provisioning Enter OC 3 Option Parameters eee T Line Aid AU4 Happing Alam Severity Signal Degrade Threshold OC3 Protection from OFF OC3 Protection from OC48 Sunc Hessage EGPDEPRPT Notice that the EQPDEPRT parameter is listed as disabled This parameter enables or disables the Equipage Dependent Reports and can be set using the Set NE command from the Provision Menu 5 To update the values use the down arrow list at each text box and select the appropriate values for each parameter 6 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning OC 48 Line Options FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select OC 48 Lines The following Line Provisioning dialog box appears 176 e The Provision Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 OC 48 Line Provisioning Enter OC 48 Option Parameters Line Aid line all 2 Choose a Line AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the Line AID box A list of all the OC 48 line AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one 3 Once a line address is selected you can click Get Value to see how the line is currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the
248. olor Conventions for the Network Element View Listed in the following table are the color conventions displayed in the Network Element View and what they represent If you are using a monochrome monitor these colors display in varying degrees of gray tones Gray Slots that are not equipped or ports slots that are not a valid selection Black Lines that indicate cross connections they can be solid or dashed depending on the cross connection type Sky Blue Port slots available for cross connections Purple Port slot that is an endpoint for a displayed cross connection or port slot that is selected Dark Blue All ports slots where STS 1 cross connections exist when the lines representing the cross connections are not being displayed Signifies NPPA status FT 2000 Shelves equipped with 29G or 24G OLIUs Dark Blue An STS 1 cross connection exists on the time slot DDM 2000 OC 3 or FiberReach Dark Grey One or more VT cross connection exists on the STS 1 time slot DDM 2000 OC 3 or FiberReach CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 53 STS 1 Grid cell that is selected and opened at the VT level DDM 2000 OC 3 with 29G or 24G OLIU ASCII User Interface 54 e The User Interfaces The ASCII User Interface AUI provides access to an NE in the same way that an ASCII terminal provides access You can type commands into the AUI and receive an immediate response from the NE This section concent
249. omm rtrv ulsdcc l4 l4tlif l4tItm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajnsap l4tdctid Not required to handle l4tdcnsap TDC Comm ent ulsdcc l4 l4tlif l4tItm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajorg Parser issue resolved in l4ajres CPro R8 0 l4ajrd l4ajarea l4ajsys CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 365 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 ent ulsdcc l4 l4etdc Not required to handle l4tdctid TDC l4tdcorg l4tdcres l4tdcrd l4tdcarea l4tdcsys l4tdcsel prirv x25 0 System rtrv x25 Sync set sync rtrv sync mode switch syn source syn auto reconfig Switch _____ ee _ Feature CONCAT enabled Alarm set attr alm rtrv attr alm alarm delay clear delay pmn set attr cont erso cont Port amp Line set t3 rtrv mode ais alarm level failure thrshld state fmt format pm mode frame format 366 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 Port amp Line set state t3 rtrv t3 primary state Port amp Line set ec 1 rtrv ec 1 alarm level signal degrade thr Port amp Line set state ec rtrv ec primary state Port amp Line set oc3 rtrv oc3 kbyte message syncmsg
250. on Map or Partition Inventory CPro 2000 does the following e logs into the local node e inventories the local node and displays its Network Element View NOTE Only one user should operate on a subnetwork at one time Once the Partition Inventory is performed by that one user the best way to ensure that the inventory stays accurate is to have only one user logged into the subnetwork at the same time WARNING The Subnetwork View may change if multiple users are logged onto the subnetwork at the same time Contents of the Partition Inventory During a Partition Inventory CPro 2000 retrieves information about all of the nodes in the partition including topology equipage cross connections and alarms Partition Topology The Lucent Technologies SONET NEs provide a capability for each NE in a partition to list all other NEs in the partition and point out from that list those NEs that are directly connected to it neighbors and the local interfaces used for those connections When such information from all NEs in the partition is put together and analyzed the layout or the topology of the entire partition can be derived This information is essential for all subnetwork level operations such as end to end provisioning of paths Equipage The Partition Inventory queries the NEs to determine how each slot is equipped CPro 2000 displays this information graphically and uses it for commands related to port provisioning and cross connections
251. on and select End to End from the pop up menu and then select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for WT1 5 signal rate and Twoway Ring Transport E aMC OC3 F 2 Near the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose an add drop node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 207 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this add drop node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected 208 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 aNC OC3 E SNC OC3 F 5 You are prompted to select the next add drop node Double click the desired node The following screen appears 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click OK The main end to end path form appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 209 SNC 0OC3 E BNC OC3 F 7 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to creat
252. onnection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties sts3 1w 8 as ls 7a NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter 2 You can click Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the Multi drop cross connection icon right hand side of toolbar The following screen appears 152 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose Low Speed Slots 3 While holding down the Shift key or Control key select the multiple low speed slots for the cross connection destination Click OK NOTE Pressing Shift allows a contiguous range of slots to be selected with the mouse Pressing Control allows a noncontiguous range to be selected 4 The Cross Connection Properties box redisplays Select the Source TIDs from the down arrow list Click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter Enter Oneway 5 Click Yes if you want to create the multiple cross co
253. onnections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 le SNC OC3 J DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 4 ir in S S SS j Enter Hairpin Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 CPro 2000 supports hairpin cross connections for DDM 2000 OC 3 NEs where both the source and the destination of the cross connection are in low speed slots Hairpin cross connections are entered using the same procedure as two way VT1 5 cross connections previously described Types of hairpin cross connections that are now supported by CPro 2000 include e 0x1 Intra Slot Hairpin Cross Connection between any addresses except different slots for example C 1 1 1 to C 2 1 1 C 1 1 1 to C 2 1 2 e 0x1 Inter FN Hairpin Cross Connection address and address 2 are on different function units e pass through in FN Slot Pair Cross Connection address 1 and address 2 are the same NOTE For information regarding necessary equipage and restrictions for entering hairpin cross connections see the Lucent Technologies DDM 2000 OC 3 Multiplexer User Service Manual The following screen depicts the types of hairpin cross connections supported by CPro 2000 SNC OC3 D DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 1 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 127 Enter Single 0x1 STS 1 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter Single 0x1 VT1 5 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding d
254. ons aisnc Port amp Line ent oc12 rtrv oc12 kbyte syncmsg type sfthr st ent crs sts3c rtrv crs sts3c X conn ent ers stsI rtrv ers sts1 Channel ent sts rtrv sts 1 x conn must exist sfthr AID must be all aisncsa aisnc Channel ent sts3c rtrv sts3c x conn must exist feat sts3c enabled sfthr AID must be all aisncsa aisnc CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 361 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 Perf set th oc12 rtrv th oc12 See SpecCond 630 all can be used to retrieve all these parameters s Starts from R8 0 Perf set th oc3 rtrv th oc3 See SpecCond 630 all can be used to retrieve all these parameters s Perf set th sts 1 rtrv th sts1 See SpecCond 630 all can be used to retrieve all these parameters s 362 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 12 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Area RestoreCmd BackupCmd Parameter Special Conditions 7 0 Conditions 7 0 Perf set th t3 rtrv th t3 See SpecCond 630 cvl nend all can be used to esl nend retrieve all these ses nend parameters s oof nend cvp nend esp nend
255. or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 6 When created the cross connections appear in the Network Element View as in the following example 144 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 SNC 0C3 C DDM 2000 OC 3 R9 1 Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The cross connection must be established in the Add direction In other words the source must be a low speed slot and the destination must be a tributary The following screen appears when you release the mouse button NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 145 2 You can click Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the DRI icon third from left hand side of toolbar You can also select the Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists 3 Click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter i jEnter Oneway DAI lz 5b sts3 le 8 F6 4
256. ore Cmd i Port amp Line Port amp Line Port amp Line Port amp Line X conn X conn X conn _ Channel ent sts 1 Channel Perf I Perf set th oc3 348 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters Backup Cmd rtrv t3 rtrv ec1 rtrv ocl rtrv tl rtrv t3 rtrv ec rtrv oc 1 rtrv crs sts3c rtrv crs sts 1 rtrv crs vtl rtrv vtl rtrv sts 1 rtrv sts rtrv th all Parameter Special Conditions ntfcncde ais sfthr vmr mode fmt pmmd frame linecode pbit xbit DS3 out from BBG20 aisalm for BBG20 iets ntfcncde sfthr ee ry le ne N Jan e e go Nn e Only with 24G or 29G See eS sfthr aisncsa alsne pst See DN pa eee r e ess ss o sfthr sfail aisncsa aisnc po See SpecCond 630 pwr bias CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 13 0 13 5 ie E E B 15 0 eee E REE ap sess ss o Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with TL1 continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Perf See SpecCond 630 l l Perf set th t3 x KO K A KO KOKAK x KKK KM KM MK Ss Kx x Kx KK x KKK KM MK x KKK KM KM MK F Un KO KO K A pe x KKK A MK f b2 ses b2 uas See SpecCond 630 See SpecCond 630 cvl nend X esl nend X sesl nend X oof nend cvp nend esp nend sesp nend uasp nend x x See SpecCond 630 p lt ps p lt See SpecCond 630 oof fend cvp fend
257. orm you are prompted to choose the Add Drop Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen displays Choose the Low Speed Slot 3 Select the low speed slot for the Add Drop Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click OK The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 259 Choose the Timeslot Se A 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click OK 5 The main end to end path form displays updated with the Add Drop Node information you have selected Enter End To End Path 6 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Primary Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen appears 260 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low Speed Slot _ E b 1 1 1 7 Select the low speed slot for the Primary Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Primary Node information you have selected 8 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to select the Secondary Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 261 9 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node Click OK The main end to e
258. orm you are prompted to choose the Primary Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot B 6 Select the low speed slot for the Primary Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Primary Node information you have selected 266 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter End To End Path POC Lads mbk ibe ibd Papbe ociz f ui 1z 3 mbi gbe mbli mb OC 12 2 7 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to select the Secondary Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen appears 8 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node Click OK The main end to end path form displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 267 Enter End To End Path gt Ciri mbk mb mbi yb oes ociz 3 mbi yb mb tir mi 2 OC iz 2 9 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path x 268 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 10 You may click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes The following message box displays GEE 11 Click OK then click Cancel in the End to End Path
259. ormal For a DSI circuit pack with performance monitoring or a T1EXT pack the following screen appears Enter 051 Option Parameters Port Addres Line Coding Alarm Level PH Mode Formal CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 For IMA LAN packs the following screen appears ort Provisioning Enter 251 Option Parameters Port Address Ia Line Coding Alarm Level ALS Failure Threshold BPY to LOS State PH Hode Formal 4 To update values use the down arrow lists at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning NCT 2 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select NCT 2 Lines The following dialog box displays CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 183 184 e The Provision Menu NCT Port Provisioning gt Enter NET Option Parameters Line Address Curent Yalue Current Yalue ear ah Current Yalue gt Cow Choose a line address by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the line address box A list of all NCT 2 line addresses for the current node is displayed Choose one Once a line address is chosen click Get Value to see how the line is currently provisio
260. ory RTRV FEAT Retrieve Feature i o RTRV FECOM Retrieve Far End Communications a l RTRV HSTY Reports History RTRV LGN Retrieve Login o S RTRV LINK Retrieve Link o o RTRV PASSWD Retrieve Password RTRV PM LINE Retrieve Performance Monitoring Line a RTRV PM SECT Retrieve Performance Monitoring Section Data STS1PM Data DS1 Data DS3PM RTRV PM TCA Retrieve Performance Monitoring TCA Lo ed RTRV PM T3 Retrieve Performance Monitoring T3 Reports PM 306 e Appendix A DDM 2000 OC 3 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Menu Item Data VT 1PM ee ee S Threshold Line ERAS tired seeno aE Threshold Section ESS tesa Threshold STS 1 eS tea ee Threshold T1 eS tire noos o Threshold T3 RTRV PMTHRES VT1 Retrieve Performance Monitoring Threshold VT1 5 RTRV SECU sd Retrieve Security PRTRV STATE Retrieve State o RTRV STATE EQPT_ Retrieve State Equipment RTRV STATE PATH_ Retrieve State Path RTRV STATE STSI Retrieve State STS 1 RTRV STATE VTI Retrieve State VTLS o To RTRV STSI Retrieve STS 4 o RTRV SYNC Retrieve Synchronization RTRV ULSDCC Retrieve Upper Layer Section DCC RTRV VTI Retrieve VTLS o SET ATTR ALM_ Set Attribute Alarm ooo SET ATTR CONT Set Attribute Control SET ATTR ENT_ Set Attribute Environment SET DATE id SetDate oo SET FEAT sd Sect Feature S SET FECOM si Set Far End Communications SET LGN Cid SetLogin o a
261. ouble click the desired node The following screen appears 216 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click OK The main end to end path form appears SNiC OC3 E SsNC OC3 F 7 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 217 8 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 9 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Access Edit Click OK Enter End To End Path Ed wD Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed 10 The following screen shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path View Report Provision Update Window X Conns Alarms Help le 2 SNC OC3 E MegaStar 2000 R9 1 I Ie snc oc3 F MegaStar 2000 R91 ria me m2 3 22G2 U OLIU Enter an STS 3C Two way End to End Path DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 NOTE 218 e The End to End Path Menu is equipped with 24G U or 29G OLIU For the STS 3C path type to be available the following restrictions must be followed A low speed slot in th
262. own the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a single 0x1 cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be a low speed slot For DDM 2000 OC 3 The low speed slots must contain a single 27 type OLIU or BBG19 circuit pack If both slot pairs are equipped one must be set to in service IS and one must be set to NMON For DDM 2000 OC 12 The low speed slot must contain only one 21 type OLIU circuit pack The OC 3 line application parameter for the function unit used in the cross connection must be set to 0x for TL1 and MML 2 The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties Ei T From gt To m 2 6 2 gt b 1 6 3 3 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect or click OK and the following screen appears 128 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Confirm Cross Connection Enter x k Enter Single Ux From m 2 6 2 To b 1 6 3 Caution Execution of this command may affect service For the existing equippage this Single S1 cross connection will be made in the M1 direction 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation
263. pany operations for example network surveillance and provisioning OS See Operations System CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Packet Assembler Disassembler An interface between a device and an X 25 packet switched network The packet assembler disassembler PAD converts the protocol used by the device and the X 25 protocol used by the network allowing terminals to exchange data with other packet mode terminals and hosts PAD See Packet Assembler Disassembler Partition A partition is a logical grouping of network elements of similar types all running compatible releases of software A ring hub and chain are considered to be partitions Performance Monitoring PM Data Data that measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems before an alarm is generated SLC 2000 The Lucent Technologies digital loop carrier system with a built in OC 3 SONET multiplexer SONET See Synchronous Optical Network STS 1 The basic building block logical signal in the SONET standard with a rate of 51 840 Mbps STS 3 The basic building block logical signal with a rate of 155 52 Mbps Subnetwork A group of interconnecting and inter related NEs The most common connotation is a SONET subnetwork in which the NEs have DCC connectivity Synchronous Optical Network The North American standard for the rates and formats defining optical signals and their constituents
264. parameter to set the Equipage Dependent Report Set this parameter to enable if you want a report on all pre provisioning information Set EQPDEPRPT to disable for information based on equipage CPro 2000 displays the selected status in the provision dialog boxes of DS3 Port EC1 Port OC 3 Line and OC 12 Line 2 On the screen that appears for your NE type click Get Values to display how the node is currently configured 3 Using the down arrow lists select the options appropriate for the node you are configuring 4 Click Set Values to activate the new NE options CAUTION Clicking on Set Values after changing the values of certain parameters will cause the NE to reset This temporarily halts the communication between CPro 2000 and the NE CPro 2000 displays a message box describing the situation When the reset is complete click OK in the dialog box CPro 2000 then attempts to establish communication with the NE If you are logged off the node try to reconnect to the node through the AUI If you are unable to reconnect through the AUI close the subnetwork from the GUI select New Subnetwork from the Access Menu then enter the UserID and Password in the Login window CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 171 5 Click Close at any time to end the session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value your changes will not be saved Provisioning Update NE Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2
265. port pull down menu select Cross Connections A report similar to the following appears Cross Connections Report tmprep tmp CPro 2000 Cross Connections Report ee March 21 1999 13 47 This is a FT 2000 OC 46 network element Network Element FT6 2 FT 2000 OC 46 9 0 112 e The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Timeslot Usage Purpose To display a report that indicates where cross connections currently exist and where time slots are available for paths to be created This command option is only available from the Subnetwork View As described in the Report Screen Functions section earlier in this chapter a variety of tasks can be performed on the report such as saving the report to a file or printing out the report NOTE A Partition Inventory must be taken before the Timeslot Usage report can be generated Procedure 1 From the Report pull down menu select Timeslot Usage A report similar to the following appears Timeslot Usage Report tmprep tmp SSM CPro 2000 Timeslot Usage Report March 19 1999 qi 20 36 For Partition F 1 Thi partition contains 2 DDM 2000 OC 12 network elementis pot de tT a O A U E oe 1 re fe E 4 H CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Report Menu e 113 The following designations appear in the Timeslot Usage report e X equals a cross connection that does not form a path also known as a dangling cross connection
266. ported in CPro 2000 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 314 Appendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands 315 FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Command Set ccccccccccccceeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 315 POOS e E E A A 315 Cross Reference Table winsc dasusacacindssasdedecndicwdunsanndscatadjnndemsbgandnd aaidiswsedaenSndsauticniacgandies 315 FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Task Oriented Procedures cccccccccssessseeeeeeeeeeeeees 318 POSE e E E S A TE E A A E 318 Cross Reference Table for Tasks Supported in CPro 2000 ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 318 Appendix D Script and Batch Files 319 a ana oss a E et naive etn obstacle tgs dats A E E EE 319 Supported Statements eserse eitan iieii ren EEEE E EEEE nE En E 320 TRANSMITT 6 is ace cisteieciedtencttec tena E a a EEE 320 DIALNUMBER SO i cccsisesceasesecconsestecossannacnerebersensdabaconetedadoasaneecmerenerinnstueeconededess 320 WATTOR SiE ee Ra nee 320 PAUSE VV QU TIE eiei Gnas wi cos is dtide sino sees odlaadioes O EA 320 TT PING EE a A A A A A A 320 UEa e 8 0 NE S EEA ENE AEE O AAA NE E O A 321 PESE a E E E A radio nneteecoianans 321 USE RMS G SN E E E E E EON EA 321 ERROR MSG SUNO ese cae secpecctis enact ceca EE E R EEE EPA FTE N E E EEN A T A E EN N E E A 322 PND oes sc es E weeps conc nec E a nag guaeeeenteeeaceaaucun E 322 TEMP P EE aeaa E deaeaseenenesoarcnnensacsensdneccoeueoeeaueuseceauenssvenaes oad RTO TAG ea a A E E E E E EAR L CPro 2
267. provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning Set NPPA Options FT 2000 OC 48 Purpose To display and or modify the current value for NPPA The NPPA can be applied to either direction and will affect the whole ring Procedure l From the Provision pull down menu select Set NPPA The following dialog box displays NOTE If an STS 3 AID is selected the Get Value button is disabled The Get Value button is enabled only when an STS 1 address is selected 178 e The Provision Menu 2 Choose the AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the AID box A list of all the AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one Once an AID is selected you can click Get Value to see how the AID is currently provisioned If a line address is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters To update the value use the down arrow list and select the appropriate value Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Provisioning Set CID Secu Options FT 2000 OC 48 Purpose To display and or mo
268. pting the selection of the signal rate and path type The selection of these two options dynamically changes the form to reflect the information needed to create that specific type of path CPro 2000 supports the following types of two endpoint end to end paths across a single ring e VT1 5 Two way Ring Transport DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U or 29G U OLIV and FiberReach e VT1 5 T1 Two way FiberReach e STS 1 Two way Ring Transport DDM 2000 OC 12 OC 3 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U or 29G U OLIU e STS 3C Two way DDM 2000 OC 12 and OC 12 OC 3 mixed ring when OC 3 is equipped with 24G U or 29G U OLIU e STS 3 Two way FT 2000 OC 48 e STS 3 One way FT 2000 OC 48 e STS 1 Two way FT 2000 OC 48 e STS 1 One way FT 2000 OC 48 The procedures following this section provide specific instructions on creating the various types of two endpoint end to end paths across a single ring For each type of path one sample is provided Please note that there may be some minor differences from the samples depending on the NE type NOTE If the path being configured is a ring with linear extensions the path around the ring and the individual linear extension cross connections are created separately See the following figure for a generic illustration of a two endpoint two way end to end path across a single ring in a subnetwork containing FT 2000 OC 48 NEs 204
269. r DDM OC 3 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 13 0 13 5 15 0 Comm ent osacmap rtrv osacmap vc type acid mf ee re Comm ent ulsdcc I3 rtrv ulsdcc 3 l3org l3res lI3rd l3area I3lv2is ent ulsdec 14 pote ep Comm rtrv ulsdcc l4 l4tlif l4tItm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm l4ajnsap l4tdctid Not required to handle l4tdcnsap TDC 352 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 ian an aan aoe icc ee ine ioe ean an aan aoe Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 13 0 13 5 15 0 Comm ent ulsdcc l4 l4tlif X X X 14tltm xX xX X 14t2tm xX xX X 14t3tm X X Xx 14t4tm xX xX X 141ftm xX xX X l4ajorg CPro parser issue X X X l4ajres resolved in R8 0 X X X l4ajrd X X x l4ajarea X X X l4ajsys X X X Comm ent ulsdcc l4 l4etdc Not required to handle l4tdctid TDC l4tdcorg l4tdcres l4tdcrd l4tdcarea l4tdcsys l4tdcsel DCC NS US X X X e eee eee d e dslpm X X X Sync set sync rtrv sync mode switching X X X syn src X X X syn auto reconfig X X X omd BBF2B line timed X X X and src set to fn c aisthres BBF2B line timed X X X sync out Swith ttrvesyne provisioned mode x Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix E Backup Restore Parame
270. r Manual Rele ase 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Files Overview CPro 2000 supports user created files These files known in CPro 2000 as script and batch files are created using the same set of command statements These are described in the following section Supported Statements Although script and batch files are essentially similar CPro 2000 differentiates between them as follows e Script files may be used effectively with CPro 2000 for the initial connection to the subnetwork e Batch files are used to execute a series of commands without the need for user input Script and batch files may be run from the AUI under the Run Script menu or from the GUI under the Access Run Batch Commands menu See the Script Files and Batch Files sections later in this chapter for a description of how these two types of user created files can be used effectively with CPro 2000 NOTE The following rules apply to script and batch files e Commands are NOT case sensitive e Indentations are permitted e There are no special naming conventions for a script or batch file although it is recommended that you append a scr extension to your script file names e Special characters such as r which equals a carriage return can be included in the file CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix D Script and Batch Filese 319 Supported Statements TRANSMITT string Outputs string at the COM po
271. r the X 25 port A PAD is required for all X 25 connections For modem to modem connections the default settings are normally acceptable for the modem at the PC end However the NE modem modem at the NE end must be set as follows see the NE User Service Manual for further details e connect at 9600 baud e set to answer e flow control off NOTE If you use a modem script to connect to CPro 2000 then you must hang up the modem manually at the end of your CPro 2000 session If you have used the AUI Dial to Connect modem command to connect to CPro 2000 you do not have to hang up the modem manually CPro 2000 recognizes that you have used a modem for connection and automatically hangs up the modem Procedure This procedure describes how to connect to the subnetwork using a modem 1 Make sure that all the communications settings are correct for the type of communications connection being made see the Selecting Communications Options from the GUI section earlier in this chapter 2 From the Communications pull down menu of the AUI select Connect If the menu choice says Disconnect you are already connected 3 The modem dials the number and after the other modem at the dialed number has answered you hear the two modems handshake to determine the baud rate at which to communicate with one another If you have successfully accessed the subnetwork the modem should display CONNECT 9600 where 9600 is the baud rate used for
272. rates on how to use the AUI in conjunction with the GUI although the AUI can be used as a stand alone terminal emulator as well NOTE An NE cannot talk to the AUI unless the AUI initiates contact No autonomous messages from an NE are acted upon by CPro 2000 CPro 2000 uses the AUI to establish communications with the NEs All commands initiated through the GUI cause information to be sent to and received from the NE This information is always visible in the AUI Multiple communication sessions can be running within a single instance of the AUI program This is called a Multiple Document Interface MDI and is similar to how other Windows programs operate For CPro 2000 this means that two sessions can use only one AUI program but have two open window sessions Sessions are differentiated by names in the title bar of the child window in the AUI they are named Default1 Default 2 and so on If you open an AUI session from a settings file the AUI title bar reflects the name of that settings file The following sample AUI screen shows MML output from a DDM 2000 NE when connection is via serial link wW CPro 2000 R11 0 AUI default 1 Connected to CPro 2000 Session iE Me IUTE J Hons x e Blalefa w Fress lt CR gt to continue oc3 5 HA B8 29 26 51 32 DDM 2006 OC 3 Fi5 5 1 rtru alm COMPLD Active Alarms and Status Heport Source Address Detected fca main Hi Bi HH 61i 43 OC12 connector failed Hi fi HA 61i 42 i
273. rger boxes rather than the smaller STS 1 slots contained within them 2 The following screen appears when you release the mouse button 134 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connection Properties 3 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the video source cross connection icon left icon from the toolbar 4 Click OK and the following screen appears PMN eS el ae EMET 7 Enter ideo Source From 5 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 6 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example l SNC OC12 HH DDM 2000 0C 12 R7 0 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 135 Enter Video Sink RTV STS 3C Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 12 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a video source cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be a low speed slot e The low speed slot must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack e The STS 3C feature must be enabled This feature
274. router For further information see the appropriate NE User Service Manual CPro 2000 can be deployed in a subnetwork that is divided into multiple areas where the NEs are configured as Level 1 L1 nodes or Level 2 L2 nodes In comparison to L1 nodes L2 nodes have the additional capability of seeing L2 nodes from areas other than their own CPro 2000 is able to distinguish between L1 nodes and L2 nodes upon login to a subnetwork CPro 2000 differentiates any discovered L2 nodes by displaying the following icons labels in the Subnetwork View and Node Manager CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 27 From left to right the above icons are representative of an OC 3 or FiberReach L2 node an L2 unexplored NE and an L2 unsupported NE Starting CPro 2000 Procedure To start CPro 2000 do one of the following e From the Start button click CPro 2000 then select the GUI or e Double click the CPro 2000 R11 0 GUI shortcut on the desktop if you created one Note that the AUI automatically displays when you open the GUI Accessing the Subnetwork With CPro 2000 configuring data communications to access the subnetwork is very flexible since it is limited only by the facilities available to the user It is a two stage process that requires you to select your communications options first before connecting to an NE You can select your communications options from either the GUI or the AUI Selecting Communicat
275. rt where string 1s any string of text enclosed between double quotations If transmitting a TL1 command a WAITFOR statement must follow the TRANSMITT string Examples TRANSMITT ho porti transmicre REry equr ally Walttor TOOT DIALNUMBER string Connects to the COM port and dials the given telephone number with pulse or tone mode where string 1s enclosed between double quotations and consists of two parts The first part is either P for Pulse or T for Tone mode The second part is the phone number which may contain dashes or spaces If an error occurs this command raises the DIALNUMBER FAIL flag Examples DIALNUMBER P 1 908 555 1212 dialnumber TTP 2 i908 555 LALAN NOTE This command connects to the COM port so do not attempt to connect to the COM port before running this command WAITFOR string Waits for any of a list of tokens from the COM port where string is enclosed between double quotations and contains up to 20 tokens separated by 0 If an error occurs this command raises the WAITFOR FAIL flag Examples WAITFOR DESTINATION Ologin lt 0 waitfor lt 0 PAUSE nWaitTime Waits for specified milliseconds where nWaitTime is a specified wait time in milliseconds with a maximum of 2 147 483 647 Example PAUSE 1000 DIALCANCEL Disconnects the phone connection established through DIALNUMBER 320 Appendix D Script and Batch Files CPro 2000 User Manual Rele ase 11 0
276. rtcut Report Protection State Displays a report that shows the NPPA protection switching state for the current node in FT 2000 OC 48 Network Element View only Report Port Slot Options Provides a list in the Report Viewer of the current DS1 DS3 EC1 NCT 2 OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 and LS port line slot options for the current node in the Network Element View Not all of these options are available for every NE type or release X Conns Enter Individual Provides steps for creating individual or ranges of Range cross connections X Conns Delete Individual Provides steps for deleting individual or ranges of Range cross connections Provision DS1 Ports Retrieves current or sets new Port Line Options for Proecioncl Pore DS1 DS3 T1 EC1 NCT 2 OC 1 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 and LS Not all of these options are Provision DS3 Ports available for every NE type or release Provision EC1 Ports Provision NCT 2 Lines Provision OC 1 Lines Provision OC 3 Lines Provision OC 12 Lines Provision OC 48 Lines Provision Set NPPA Displays or sets the value for the Protection Access State for FT 2000 OC 48 NEs Provision Set Date Displays or modifies the current date or time of the NE Provision Set NE Sets options for the current NE including some or all of the following access identifier AID TID Node ID Directory Services assignment of gateway network element GNE DDM 2000 only alarm GNE AGNE alarm group ALMGRP X 25 packet size X25ps
277. s 8 Click Yes to delete all overlapping multiple cross connections Delete a Range of VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach Procedure 1 Select the source range by clicking on the first cross connection line in the range and then while holding down the Shift key click on the end cross connection line of the range 2 Press Delete or drag the cross connection lines to the trash can icon located in the bottom right hand corner of the GUI 3 The following screen appears asking the user to confirm the cross connection deletion Contim Cross Connection Delete X Delete T woway From m 2 2 1 To m 2 2 1 Caution Execution of this command may affect service 4 Click Yes to All if you want to delete all of the cross connections in the range Click Yes if you want to delete each cross connection in prompted mode While in prompted mode click No if you do not want to delete one of the cross connections in the range Click Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 If you choose to delete multiple cross connections the following screen appears Warming Please Confirm Your Action X You have selected multiple Cross Connections to be deleted Are you sure you want to delete ALL of them Select Ho to reconsider deleting all Cross Connections 6 Click Yes to delete the selected cross connections Click No if you do not want to delete the selected cross connections
278. s ASCII See American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII User Interface The CPro 2000 ASCII user interface provides access to the CIT port of an NE in the same way that an ASCII terminal provides access The user can type commands into the ASCII user interface AUTI and receive an immediate response from the NE AUI See ASCII User Interface Baud Rate The number of times per second that the state in a channel is switched or reversed during data transmission Each state change may represent two or three bits therefore a baud rate of 300 may equal 900 bits per second Channel A transmission path or link CIT See Craft Interface Terminal CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Glossary of Terms e 383 384 e Glossary of Terms Craft Interface Terminal The user interface terminal that is part of an NE and is used by craft personnel to operate the NE DACS III 2000 The Lucent Technologies digital access and cross connect system that provides clear channel switching at either the DS3 or the STS 1 rates DACS IV 2000 The Lucent Technologies digital access carrier and cross connect system that provides electronic DS3 STS 1 or DS1 VT1 5 cross connect capability Data Communications Equipment Data communications equipment DCE is the functional equipment that establishes maintains and ends a connection the signal conversion and the coding required for communications with a data circuit D
279. s Pager number called and date and time of alarm notification e Pager Disabled Date and time pager feature was disabled Close this window from the File menu or by using the Close button Deleting a pager log file To delete a log file l i 294 e The Alarms Menu ase 11 0 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed Click Delete in the Pager Log File If no Pager Log File exists the follow message appears CPro 2000 User Manual Rele Alarm If a Pager Log File exists the following confirmation message appears Alarm 3 Click OK to proceed or Cancel to withdraw the command NOTE The system permits deletions of Pager Log Files only after the pager service is disabled ii The Call List Tab From the Call List tabbed page you can e specify a pager number e type in a name to associate with that pager number e select the pager type and e specify alarm levels to be associated with that pager number In addition you can add edit or delete the names and phone numbers from the call list CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Alarms Menu e 295 Alarm Preferences Defining the call list parameters 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the Call List tab The following page appears Alarm Preferences 3 Click Add to act
280. s If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 1 cpror1 11 0 2 Choose the script file that you want to execute and click OK NOTE The script or batch files are customized files set up by the CPro 2000 system administrator Any newly created files should be tested prior to use Open Partition Purpose To expand a selected partition in the Subnetwork View and displays the individual NEs in the partition Procedure 1 Inthe Subnetwork View click the desired partition icon to be expanded 2 From the Access pull down menu select Open Partition 3 The selected partition is expanded and the individual NEs for the partition are displayed 88 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Close Partition Purpose To close an expanded partition in the Subnetwork View Procedure 1 Inthe Subnetwork View click the desired partition icon to be closed 2 From the Access pull down menu select Close Partition 3 The selected partition is closed and the individual NEs for the partition are no longer displayed Open NE Purpose To displays the Network Element View for a selected NE Procedure 1 Inthe Subnetwork View click the box representing the individual NE to be displayed A partition must be expanded to see the individual NEs 2 From the Access pull down menu select Open NE 3 The Network Element View is displayed for the NE Exit Purpose To e
281. s correct click OK The following screen appears Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path ra 5 You are prompted to select the next add drop node Double click the desired node The following screen appears 220 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low Speed Slot PE 6 Select the low speed slot for this add drop node Click OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path a 7 Ifthe information you have selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue 8 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 221 9 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path wD Enter End To End Path Operation successfully completed 10 The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path CPro 2000 Release 4 03 01 8 16 96 DDM 2000 OC 12 0C12 D Ee
282. s from a PC or laptop via a command based ASCII User Interface AUI and Graphical User Interface GUI For DDM 2000 FT 2000 SLC 2000 and FiberReach NEs the native AUI available within the CPro 2000 environment is the same ASCII text based user interface that these NEs provide as an integral part of their generic software Users have access via an industry standard VT 100 terminal also known as an ASCII terminal However within the CPro 2000 environment the ASCII interface provides a number of useful features that may not be available on an ASCII terminal such as user developed scripts cut and paste capability and session capture to a file The CPro 2000 GUI allows users to execute tasks on the subnetwork or on specific NEs in the subnetwork by selecting commands from the menus and objects from the graphical display Tasks that may normally require typing several long ASCII interface commands can be accomplished with a few mouse clicks in the GUI The GUI is developed to be common across several Lucent Technologies SONET products However since the ASCII interfaces of each product are slightly different from one another the graphical layer also provides the important function of minimizing such differences This enables the users to focus more on the network operations and less on syntax differences between different types of NEs CPro 2000 Customer Assistance Customer assistance and troubleshooting for CPro 2000 are ava
283. se the View function to make the size of the report larger or smaller by selecting a value from the View down arrow list e Access the Page function by using the arrows lt lt lt gt gt gt to go through the report page by page either backward or forward or by clicking the Page box and editing the page number NOTE The Page Up and Page Down keys on your PC keyboard do not work in the Report Viewer Also the scroll bar appearing on the right side of the Report Viewer does not take you to the next page of the report the scroll bar only takes you from top to bottom of an individual page Use the arrows as described above to access the next or previous page of the report e Use the Print function to display an abbreviated Print menu from which to select a print option e Use the Save function to save your report to a file name so it can be accessed at a later time through the Report Viewer command in the View menu e Use the Close function to close the report without saving it to a file unless you have already done so using the Save function e Use the Settings function to access full selection of print settings Use the Close Settings command to return to the basic report functions but not to close the report 110 e The Report Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Path Purpose To view a report that contains information about the complete and or incomplete end to end paths in the partition This command option is on
284. selected is correct click OK to create the end to end path and the following screen appears Enter End To End Path ix Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 233 8 Click No if you do not want to create the end to end path none of your selections will be implemented If you want to proceed click Yes 9 When your path has been successfully completed the following screen appears Click OK Enter End To End Path fa Enter End To End Path Operation successtully completed 10 The screen below shows a graphical representation of the newly created end to end path R80 Enter an STS 1 One way End to End Path FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS1 signal rate and 1WAY path type 234 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Enter End To End Path NOTE When the Audit On box is checked the alarm feature which notifies the user of any signal problem is activated To turn off this feature click the box to remove the check mark 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose an add node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot
285. sestecee 143 Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 145 Enter Two way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 147 Enter Two way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI PRI Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 149 Enter Two way STS 3 or STS 1 DRI SEC Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 150 Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 Multi drop Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 152 Change LocA and LocZ Values for an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection FT 2000 OC 48 cc cecsssssssseeeececcecceeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 154 Roll an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection to a New Source TTE OOO O Ai eee enc een nner er ener te een nee eee eee eer te 156 Delite a Cross C onne HON nescii eee on eee ee nner eee 15 Delete a Range of VT1 5 Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach 159 The Provision Menu 161 I sas E E A oes ereaees 161 Provisioning OC 12 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and PTE OOT OCA a E pied Daetpuedoncipeenterccwed eects 162 Provisioning OC 3 Line Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and Piber REAC h pn ener ate nent ee nr Cee eRe Eee ae ren ne ee eo eee ee eee ne 164 Provisioning DS3 Port Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 FT 2000 OC 48 and PIGER EAC 1 Panera nen anne eRe nt ES 166 Provisioning EC1 Port Options DDM 2000 OC 3 DDM 2000 OC 12 and FT a EE EE se essen ae esac aes poe es E seg Assesses tees 167 Provisioning Set Date Options DDM
286. spond to the transmit fiber from and receive fiber to Main 1 m1 for DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach mb 1 for DDM 2000 OC 12 The vertically stacked boxes on the right side correspond to the transmit fiber from and receive fiber to Main 2 m2 for DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach mb 2 for DDM 2000 OC 12 in ring configurations The horizontally arranged boxes at the bottom of the screen correspond to the function units used for add drop cross connections NOTE If a DDM 2000 OC 3 or SLC 2000 contains 27 type OLIU circuit packs in main slots CPro 2000 only displays two available STS 1s in the mains instead of the usual three These are labeled m1 and m2 Ifa DDM 2000 OC 3 contains a 21 type OLIU circuit pack in either the mains or the function units there is no access to the VT1 5s CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The User Interfaces e 47 NE View for DDM 2000 OC 3 R15 x and FiberReach R4 x Shelves Equipped with 29G or 24G OLIUs The following section describes the NE view for DDM 2000 0C 3 R15 x and FiberReach R4 x shelves with 29G OLIUs in the main slots Green Line CPro 2000 R11 0 GUI 0C3 4 DDM 2000 01 3 R151 Boxes above the Green Line As the above graphic shows the left and right boxes above the green line represent STS 3 STS 1 signal interfaces Each consists of 16 cells in four rows and four columns Each box consists of 12 STS 1s and
287. ss Connection Properties NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a drop and continue cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be a low speed slot e For DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 the low speed slot being used in the cross connection must contain an STS 1E or an OLIU circuit pack 2 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the drop and continue icon from the toolbar 3 Click OK and the following screen appears Conin Ciise Annee NoN Ener Enter Drop nd Continue From mb 4 l To b 1 Ring Direction Mmanda mat f r ECi Service NOTE The ring direction for the cross connection is specified according to which high speed side is involved when establishing the cross connection m1 mb1 side versus m2 mb2 side 142 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 4 Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 5 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example e SNC OC12 GG DDM 2000 OC 12 R7 0 NOTE The solid portion of the cross connection points in the direction of the ring ID Enter a Range of VT1 5 Drop and Continue Cross Connections DDM 2000 OC 3 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View
288. stance and troubleshooting 24 hours a day See your Lucent Technologies account representative for further details This document was produced by Customer Training and Information Products CTIP Contents About This Manual 1 roduc nesens in E E 2 Intended AUIGIS NCS eiiiai 1 Engineering Planners Craft Personnel and Maintenance Personnel cc08 i Centralized Work Center Personnel 0 cccccccccccssssssseeeeeececcceeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeceeeceeeeeeeaaas 2 OY SINUS Used einet a E 2 Gencral Conven ONS sassoni EA EARE 2 Mouse COTY SITIONS caseras iE aaasiesoeabeeesdunsaees 2 Keyboard Conventions ae tig arse ny rps iss ty seis ncn dca na Regine ance seule gzasce antec 3 Introduction 9 The Concept of CPro2 000 enaa Or ne aaa a A gt CPro 2000 Customer Assistance cccccccccccccccecececeesssssseeeecececcceeseesessuasaeeesseeeceeeeeeseeesaaaenssees 5 Troubleshooting seerias a A On fe re Eaa es a 6 Syslem Regue 1 0c ce ee a a 6 NSPE CE Ce 5 3u E E ces ce anise E AE E EE A EE O E E E E E 6 Oy E AAA E AEA EA ONEEN E TE A O T EE A 6 Supported Network Elements ic icacatsacacincsicaseasduldticeneddcedadnatdcdne acetal veeduldaedscdaraanateevamsacecsseuecdcdcenecs 7 TS A UI EE A A ET A E enact N T E E A E S E ces aacees 7 Installation 9 Ie Wi EEA A A NEEE E A E E E E 9 Pro 2 000 Insta anO aeinn E EEO 9 Uninstalling CPro 2000 RITTO ocean cecanisesdaicavntsinecaseassicuaasesanyeadnidavetekaecseeeeeioceaees 14 Customizi
289. stination TID Fb 3 List of cross connections TID F6 2 Source Aid ls 4a Destination Ard sts3 1e 4 0NEWAY LOC FB6 TID F6 3 So0urce Aid sts3 14 4 Destination Aid ls 4a 0NHEWAYT LOCA F6 Click the path name you want to delete The path name is highlighted NOTE For paths containing both active and standby cross connections for example DRI and OC 3 1 1 only the active cross connections are listed in the path index list Standby cross connections are not displayed in the list even though they are displayed in the Network Element View and are also deleted oP 4 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Click Close if you do not want to delete a path and you want to end this operation Click Delete Path to delete the path and the following screen appears Delete End to End Path Caution Execution of this command may affect service Do you want to continue Click No if you do not want to delete the selected end to end path and you want to end this operation Click Yes if you want to delete the selected end to end path The following screen appears The End to End Path Menu e 283 5 6 7 Modify LocA LocZ Purpose Warning Please Confirm Your Action gt Are you sure that you want to delete the selected path Click No if you want to abort the command and end this operation Click Yes if you want to delete the selected end to end path When your path has been successfully completed the fol
290. swords that CPro 2000 uses during a session to inventory or map a partition There are three ways to set access in CPro 2000 You can set access from e the Login window at login e the Node Manager e asaved subnetwork The following sections provide instructions on how to use each method Setting access from the Login window 1 Bring up CPro 2000 R11 0 2 From the Access Menu click New Subnetwork The Login window appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 81 UserlB Password E r IC eT 3 Select the desired Login Script then check off either Inventory Partition or Partition Map See the Startup chapter for more information about the login scripts and partitions 4 Click OK Login TID UserlB Password 5 Enter the UserID and Password for each node 6 Click OK after entering the login information for each node The login window appears for each node in the ring When you click Map Partition or Inventory Partition later in the session CPro 2000 will use the login information provided to map or inventories the partitions in the network Setting Access from the Node Manager 1 Log onto a network in the usual manner 2 Click the Node Manager button The Node Manager screen displays 82 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro Node Manager oD SHW View L OC3 12 DDM 2000 OC 3 Rel 15 0 2 L OC3 13 FR2 B Login Update Map Swit
291. te on your keyboard Any cross connection that can be entered via the GUI can be deleted via the GUI NOTE While creating and deleting cross connections you may see that the arrowheads on the end of a cross connection appear to be lying on their side The arrowheads are shown like this when there is not enough space to accommodate the arrowhead pointing straight Entering Cross Connections The following pages show the procedures and screen displays for entering the various types of cross connections in CPro 2000 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connections e 125 Enter Two way STS 1 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and OC 12 or Enter Two way VT1 5 Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 3 and FiberReach Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection The following screen appears when you release the mouse button Cross Connection Properties 2 You can click Cancel if the addresses shown in the screen are incorrect or click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter 3 Click Yes to create the cross connection You can click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation 4 When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example 126 e Cross C
292. ters e 353 Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Alarm set attr alm rtrv attr alm alarm delay X clear delay pmn Alarm set attr env rtrv attr env alarm RT only almtype desc Alarm set attr cont rtrv attr cont RT only Port amp Line set t rtrv tl line coding alarm level dlc bpv tolos ais failure threshold pm mode only in PM pack format only in PM pack Port amp Line rtrv t3 alarm level ais failure threshold mode format pm mode frame xbit DS3 out from BBG20 aisalm for BBG20 Port amp Line set ec 1 rtrv ec1 alarm level signal degrade Port amp Line set lan rtrv lan erpid aal5 vpi vci length scrambler polynom fes alm pmmd Port amp Line set nct rtrv nct ctsenabled cts tcts mode Port amp Line set oc 1 rtrv oc 1 nsa ais signal degrade thr 354 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 a e U e o EEEO OEO E eee EE ee ee pope merc cm een rp Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for DDM OC 3 with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd o Port amp Line set state t1 rtrv t1 Port amp Line set state t3 Port amp Line set state ec 1 Port amp Line set state oc 1 rtrv state oc 1 Port amp Line set state vil rtrv state vtl primary state PO ent crs sts3C E B X on i fentorsstsh set state sts 1 rtrv state sts primary state set pmthres sect rtrv pmthres sect CPro 20
293. the TID is added to the TID list in your CPRO INI file The latest entry appears at the top of the list Each subsequent time you log in these TID names appear in a down arrow list by the TID field NOTE If you attempt to delete or renumber the TID list in the CPRO INI file ensure that the list is kept in sequential order CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 ALARM POLLING This section contains entries that determine whether the automatic alarm polling feature is enabled or disabled and the specified time interval between alarm polling events The default setting for this feature is disabled AUTO identifies whether the alarm polling feature is enabled or disabled When the entry is YES the alarm polling feature is enabled When this field is NO or blank the alarm polling feature is disabled and the time interval is reset to three minutes INTERVAL is the amount of time in minutes between automatic alarm polling events The default time interval is three minutes The minimum interval allowed is one minute Installation e 17 e AUTONOMOUS MESSAGES This section contains the entry to determine whether or not autonomous messages generated by the NE are displayed in the CPro 2000 AUI These autonomous messages keep users up to date with any changing NE conditions However they might interfere with an interactive session through the AUI DISPLAY can be set to a value of 1 or 0 When set to 1 autonomous messa
294. the start of the next alarm sound 3 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected Adjusting the alarm polling repeat interval 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Change Auto Poll Minutes to the desired repeat interval from 1 to 90 minutes using the up and down arrows The default repeat interval is 3 minutes 3 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTES e The alarm polling repeat interval can also be changed using the INI File Editor from the Access menu e Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last value selected Selecting the modem communication port 1 From the Alarms menu select Preferences The Alarm Preferences dialog box appears with the Alarm tab displayed 2 Click the down arrow next to the Modem Comm Port field to display a list of available comm ports 3 Select the comm port that corresponds to your modem 4 Click OK to save the current settings and dismiss the Alarm Preferences dialog box or Close dismiss the dialog box without saving any settings NOTE Subsequent CPro 2000 sessions open with the last selected port number Specifying a
295. the two modems CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 4 From the Access menu in the GUI select Open or New Subnetwork The Login dialog box displays immediately if you have selected New Subnetwork If you selected Open Subnetwork choose the appropriate file from which to open this subnetwork The Login dialog box displays NOTE It is important to delete any script file name that appears in the Script field This ensures that CPro 2000 uses any new settings you specified at login 5 Enter your user ID password and for TL1 access the node TID NOTE There is a 1 5 second delay for dial up connections to TL1 ports 6 Check Partition Map or Partition Inventory if you want a graphical display of the topology of the subnetwork you are logged into Leave both unchecked if you only intend to make provisioning changes to the local node see the Partitioning section earlier in this chapter NOTE Before selecting Partition Inventory we recommend that you initially connect to the NE and then use the Node Manager to preset the User ID and Passwords for other nodes in the ring See the Node Manager section of The Access Menu chapter for instructions on how to use this feature 7 Click OK After the login process the CPro 2000 GUI window appears containing the appropriate Network Element View or Subnetwork View depending on the view you selected Connecting to an NE over TCP IP CPro 2000 can connect to an NE over TCP IP only b
296. time during this operation you may click Cancel and none of your changes are executed Roll an Existing STS 3 or STS 1 Cross Connection to a New Source FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 Click the left mouse button on the line representing the cross connection for which you want to roll the source The line becomes highlighted 2 Drag the cross connection line to a new source and then release the mouse button NOTE When overlapping multiple cross connections exist the following screen appears first E Select the appropriate Cross Connection _ O x Cancel 3 Select the desired cross connection by clicking on the appropriate box Click OK and the following screen appears Roll STS 1 SNC FT D2 TWAYTDEI SNC FT D 2 Cancel 4 Youcan change either the cross connection type or the LocA LocZ NOTE If the cross connection is a drop the user can change LocA If the cross connection is an add then the user can change LocZ Both can be changed for a through connection 156 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Select the cross connection type from the down arrow list The current cross connection type is shown as the default Or Select the LocA LocZ from the down arrow list The current LocA LocZ is shown as the default If the information displayed in the dialog box is correct click Roll and the new cross connection is created You may click Cancel at any time a
297. tion l3org I3res I3rd l3area 131v21s l4tlif l4tItm 14t2tm 14t3tm 14t4tm 141ftm Appendix E Backup Restore Parameters e 339 a0 31 ao X X X X X X X X X X A O KO K a d l a a s s Ca Shc D a hdihdihd Vim Co a a a Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML continued Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Parameter Special Conditions 3 0 3 1 4 0 Comm ent ulsdcc l4 l4ajnsap Manual Adjacency rtrv ulsdcc l4 l4ajorg l4ajres l4ajrd l4ajarea l4ajsys Comm ent ulsdcc l4 l4tdctid Not required to handle l4tdcnsap TARP Date Cache rtrv ulsdcc l4 l4etdc l4tdctid l4tdcorg l4tdcres l4tdcrd l4tdcarea l4tdcsys l4tdcsel dec ns us action Sync set sync rtrv sync mode switching syn source autoconfiguration Alarm set attr alm rtrv attr alm alarm delay clear delay pmn alarm type set attr cont rtrv attr cont description RT only Backup Restore Commands Parameters and Release Relation Table for FiberReach with MML continued 340 eAppendix E Backup Restore Parameters CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Area Restore Cmd Backup Cmd Special Conditions Port amp Line set tl rtrv tl line code alarm level ais failure thrshld dlcbpv to los State pm mode Need DS1 PM pack format Port amp Line ent t3 rtrv t3 ntfcncde With DS3 in fn slots ais sfthr vmr mode fmt pmmd frame linecode pbit xbit A p lt pst Port amp Line set oc12 rtrv o
298. to End Path Menu e 253 Enter an STS 1 Three Node Interworking End to End Path DDM 2000 only Procedure 1 From the End to End Path menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available to select Click the STS1 and 3 Node Intwk tabs 2 Atthe bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Add Drop Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen displays Choose the Low Speed Slot ee 3 Select the low speed slot for the Add Drop Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click OK The following screen appears 254 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Timeslot _ m 1 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Add Drop Node information you have selected 5 At the bottom of the form you are prompted to choose the Primary Node Double click the node you have selected The following screen appears CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 255 Choose the Low Speed Slot _ b 1 6 Select the low speed slot for the Primary Node from the scroll list Only valid slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the Primary Node information you have selected 7 At the bottom of t
299. ts of the path will remain as individual cross connections 5 Click Yes to delete the entire end to end path Click No to delete only the selected cross connection or click Cancel if you do not want to delete anything NOTE If the cross connection to be deleted is a two way DRI SEC cross connection the following screen appears CPro 2000 R8 0 ix WARNING Deleting the secondary without deleting the primary will reduce the protection of DAI It is better to either delete the primary or set up a 2WATYDARISEC in another HE NOTE When overlapping multiple cross connections exist the following screens appear during the deletion process Proceed with Caution X deleted Use utmost caution before selecting TES TO ALL A You have selected one or more overlapped cross connections to be 6 Click OK Confirm Cross Connection Delete ix Delete Oneway From Is 2a To sts3 1w Destination TID SHC FT D2 Caution Execution of this command may affect service Yes to All i E Cancel 7 Click Yes to delete only the selected cross connection Click Yes to All to delete all overlapping multiple cross connections and the following screen appears 158 e Cross Connections CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Warming Please Confirm Your Action X You have selected multiple Cross Connections to be deleted Are you sure you want to delete ALL of them Select No to reconsider deleting all Cross Connection
300. twork Element Inventory and alarm information e Use the Window Menu to arrange the GUI windows to fit viewing needs e The End to End Path Menu is only available from the Subnetwork View Use this menu to enter and delete end to end paths Also available in this menu is the capability of modifying the LocA and LocZ values for an FT 2000 OC 48 STS 3 or STS 1 end to end path e The X Conns Menu contains instructions on how to enter and delete cross connections individually or in a range It does not contain the actual commands Cross connections are created or deleted by using drag and drop functionality This menu is only available while you are in a Network Element View window For information on how to create cross connections on shelves equipped with 29G OLIU circuit packs in the mains see the appropriate section in the Cross Connections chapter of this User Manual e The Help Menu provides the user with help options Some menu items are displayed with an arrow gt after them Selection of these menu items displays another level of menus For example selecting Port Slot Optionsl gt from the Reports pull down menu displays a submenu Some menu items have three bullets eee after them Selection of these menu items displays a dialog box requesting further input from the user For example selecting Backupeee invokes the Backup Parameter dialog box which requests further user input Non Preemptible Protection Access Non Pree
301. ubnetwork Purpose To access a subnetwork that has not previously been accessed or that has no subnetwork information saved for it This command is available only when no connection to a subnetwork is currently active Procedure 1 From the Access pull down menu select New Subnetwork The following Login dialog box appears UserID f Password pa Ic 2 Optionally check Partition Map or Partition Inventory See the Partitioning section in the Startup chapter for more information on partitions If you do not check Partition Map or Partition Inventory CPro 2000 does the following e logs into the local node e inventories the local node and displays its Network Element View If you select Partition Inventory CPro 2000 gathers information about all the nodes in the partition including cross connections equipage alarms and topology If you are going to be doing any type of subnetwork level task such as creating an end to end path it is necessary to take a Partition Inventory CPro 2000 users also have the option of choosing whether or not to retrieve a list of L2 nodes when logging into the subnetwork To exercise this option click the Retrieve L2 Nodes box to place a check mark See the Retrieve L2 Nodes section in the CPro 2000 Startup chapter for further details 3 Ifthe NE Interface is TL1 click the TL1 tab and either input a TID or select the TID of the initial login node from the do
302. using the ENT FEAT command See the DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details Procedure 1 From the End to End Path Menu select Enter The following form appears Only valid signal rates and path types are available for selection Click the tabs for STS3C signal rate and Video Service Enter End lo End Path 2 At the bottom of the form in the dialog box you are prompted to choose the video source node Double click the desired node displayed within the form The following screen appears 240 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low Speed Slot zal 3 Select the low speed slot to be used for this video source node Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct click OK The following screen appears Choose the Timeslot 4 Select the time slot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid time slot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 241 Enter End To End Path A 5 You are prompted to choose the video sink node Double click the desired node The following screen appears Choose the Low Speed Slot zal 6 Select the low speed slot for this video sink n
303. value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of line provisioning parameters 4 To update the values use the down arrow list at each text box and select the appropriate values for each parameter 5 Click Set Value to activate the new provisioning options You can click Close at any time to end the provisioning session If you close the session before clicking on Set Value no changes will be made Provisioning LS Port Options FT 2000 OC 48 Procedure 1 From the Provision pull down menu select LS Ports The following dialog box displays provided that there is at least one low speed circuit pack in the current node LS Port Provisioning E3 Enter LS Option Parameters Port Aid iE Protection Switching Priority Current Yalue Set Yalue Close CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Provision Menu e 177 Choose a port AID by clicking on the down arrow to the right of the port AID box A list of all port AIDs for the current node is displayed Choose one Once a port AID is chosen click Get Value to see how the port is currently provisioned If a port AID is chosen that contains the value all then the Get Value button is not available because it applies to more than one set of port provisioning parameters To update values use the down arrow list at each text box and choose the appropriate values for each option Click Set Value to activate the new
304. vice NTP 024 Add New STSIE Low Speed Group for EC 1 Interface System In Service NTP 025 Discontinue EC 1 Interface NTP 026 Convert DS3 Group Service to EC 1 Group Service DLP 541 Edit Delete or Enter a User s Login DLP 546 STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Switched Ring Configuration DLP 549 Make STS1 DS3 Cross Connections Using CIT Dual Ring Interworking Configuration 314 e Appendix B DDM 2000 OC 12 Commands CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Appendix C FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 Commands FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual Command Set sy Purpose The purpose of this section is to provide a cross reference between the Commands and Reports section of the Lucent Technologies FT 2000 OC 48 User Service Manual and the menu items of CPro 2000 Cross Reference Table FT 2000 OC 48 TL1 commands reports that do not have an entry in the CPro 2000 Menu column are not supported in CPro 2000 However please keep in mind that since CPro 2000 allows concurrent access to both GUI and AUI you can always enter the TL1 commands that are not supported on the CPro 2000 menus from the AUI window Item wua ee SC re DLT CRS STS3 Delete Cross Connection STS 3 X ee Network Element Delete DLT TADRMAP Delete TID Address Map i al DLT USER SECU Delete User Security nena Edit Date ED PID Edit Password Edit Change Password ED USER SECU Edit User Security LL l TL1 Command Description CPro 2000 Menu Item ENT CRS
305. w in a cascade format Window Tile Horizontal Arranges Network Element Views and Shift F5 Subnetwork View in a horizontal format Window Tile Vertical Arranges Network Element Views and Shift F6 Subnetwork View in a vertical format Window Arrange Icons Arranges iconified windows in an orderly fashion Shift F7 at the bottom of the GUI window End to End Path Enter Establishes an end to end path Subnetwork View only End to End Path Delete Deletes an end to end path of any type Subnetwork View only End to End Path Modify Modifies the LocA and LocZ values for an LocA LocZ FT 2000 OC 48 STS 3 or STS 1 end to end path End to End Path Tag Red Line Displays modifies paths in FT 2000 OC 48 R8 1 and tag cross connections for Red Line services Alarms Displays the Alarms menu options Alt A Alarms Auto Alarm Polling Changes existing state of Auto Alarm Polling Ctrl A Turns feature off if it is on and vice versa Check mark is displayed if feature is on CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Task Mapping e 65 66 e Task Mapping Menu Item Keyboard shortcut Alarms Audible Alarm Ctrl 1 Alarms Preferences Ctrl r Alarms Preferences Alarm Tab Audible Repeat Seconds R Alarms Preferences Alarm Tab Auto Poll Minutes P Alarms Preferences Alarm Tab Modem Comm Port C Alarms Preferences Alarm Tab Alarm Tab To access Outside Line first dial O Alarms Preferences Alarm Tab View
306. with MML cceeeesseeeeees 251 Backup Restore Commands for DDM OC 12 with TL1 eeeeeeeeeeeeees 358 Backup Restore Commands for DDM OC 12 with MML c esseeeees 364 Backup Restore Commands for FT 2000 with TL1 Special Conditions sesssncrdarreri neern a EEA A Table of NE releases per CPro TOlCaS CS icc cosa csuecezensssacsessseadscxclesesensceacncaestaveresceawecse 381 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Contentse vii viii e Contents CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 About This Manual Introduction Welcome to Lucent Technologies CPro 2000 CPro 2000 provides an intelligent user interface that enables concurrent graphics and text based interaction with members of Lucent Technologies 2000 Synchronous Optical Network SONET product family CPro 2000 mechanizes provisioning operations at the network element NE level as well as at the subnetwork level This manual describes the product features and offers detailed procedures for all CPro 2000 operations The information is arranged to sequentially follow the CPro 2000 main menu bar and associated menu items Intended Audience This manual is intended for CPro 2000 users of all experience levels CPro 2000 is applicable for all operations personnel who administer Lucent Technologies SONET NEs wherever they currently use an American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII terminal or craft interface terminal CIT Engineering
307. wn arrow list 4 For all NE types enter your user ID and press the Tab key then enter your password 70 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 NOTE See the appropriate NE documentation for procedures on how to change your user ID See The Edit Menu chapter for the procedure on how to change a password or TID 5 To use the default script file do not delete the contents of the Script field But you may specify the communications settings or select a script file See the Accessing the Subnetwork section in the Startup chapter for information on how to select communication options 6 OR To choose a script other than the default e Click the Browse button to display the Select A Script File dialog box The following screen appears Select A Script File ddm_scr Eet detault scr EJ progra 1 ee E cpron 110 e Navigate to the CPro 2000 installation directory to access the Script Files If you accepted the default during installation CPro 2000 will be in C progra 1 cpror1 11 0 e Select one of the existing data communications scripts depending on your application Click OK to select this script NOTE Although certain default script files are provided with the CPro 2000 software the user can also create script files see Appendix D Script and Batch Files for information on writing script files Check any created script files thoroughly before use 7 The Login dialog box redisplays with th
308. words the source must be a low speed slot and the destination must be a tributary The following screen appears when you release the mouse button CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Cross Connection Properties bera q NOTE When Audit On is chosen an alarm is activated to notify the user of any signal problem When Redline On is chosen the cross connection is tagged as Redlined thus prohibiting any modification until it is untagged See the Audit On and Redline On Options section earlier in this chapter 2 CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 You can click Cancel if the AIDs shown in the screen are incorrect Otherwise select the DRI SEC twoway icon fifth from left hand side of toolbar You can also select the Source and Destination TIDs from the down arrow lists Click OK and the following screen appears Confirm Cross Connection Enter lEnter Twoway DRISEC Is 8b sts3 1w 13 SNC FT C1 Destination TID SNC FT C1 Festal JA No Af Cancel Click Yes if you want to create the cross connection Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation When created the cross connection appears in the Network Element View as in the following example for a two way STS 3 DRI SEC cross connection Cross Connections e 151 SNC FT C1 STS1 FT 2000 OC 48 R8 1 W SNC FT D2 Enter One way STS 3 or STS 1 Multi drop Cross C
309. xit the CPro 2000 session Procedure 1 Choose this command when you want to terminate a CPro 2000 session You are prompted to confirm the command with the following dialog box Exit CPro 2000 R11 0 Ci This will end your CPro session Cancel 2 Ifyou click Cancel you are returned to where you were previously focused in the GUI and you are not exited from CPro 2000 If you choose OK and you are not in an active CPro 2000 session CPro 2000 closes CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Access Menu e 89 If you choose OK and you are currently in an active CPro 2000 session the following screen appears 3 Choosing No closes any open GUI windows closes the AUI window and terminates CPro 2000 If you choose Yes your subnetwork information is saved the GUI and AUI close and CPro 2000 is terminated 90 e The Access Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The Edit Menu Overview Backup The Edit Menu contains commands that back up and restore information about NEs change target identifiers TIDs and passwords and execute the dual ring interworking DRI switch for FT 2000 OC 48 The following commands are available from a Network Element View e Backup e Restore e Change TID e Change Password e Switch DRI FT 2000 OC 48 only The following command is available from a Subnetwork View e Rename Partition Purpose To create a backup copy of the current equipage cross connections and prov
310. y alfect service Yes to All ho Cancel Click Yes if you want to create the cross connections individually Click Yes to All if you want to create the entire range of cross connections in one step Click No if you do not want to establish this cross connection or Cancel if you want to cancel the entire operation When created the cross connections appears in the Network Element View as in the following example Cross Connections e 133 le SNC OC3J DDM 2000 OC 3 R13 0 Enter Video Source COV STS 3C Cross Connection DDM 2000 OC 12 Procedure 1 From the Network Element View click the source slot of the cross connection While holding down the mouse button drag the cursor to the destination slot of the cross connection NOTE The following restrictions must be followed to create a video source cross connection e One address in the cross connection must be a main and one address must be a low speed slot e The low speed slot must contain a 21 type OLIU circuit pack e The STS 3C feature must be enabled This feature is enabled in MML using the SET FEAT command supported by CPro and in TL1 using the ENT FEAT command See your DDM 2000 OC 12 User Service Manual for complete details e The OC 3 Lines application parameter in the Provision menu must be set to video NOTE When choosing the source and destination slots for the cross connection be sure to use the STS 3 slots that is click and drag to the la
311. y initializing a gateway device such as Lucent s NCC which provides a TL1 TCP IP OSI gateway or a generic terminal server which provides a TCP IP serial IO gateway NOTE Before using this feature make sure your PC is connected to a LAN 1 From the AUI window click the Connect button lt a The Dialog window appears 2 Enter the appropriate information the fields provided e Address Enter the IP address or name of your NCC or Telnet server e Protocol Select the appropriate protocol e Remote Port Enter the listening port number of your NCC or Telnet server CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 CPro 2000 Startup e 35 NOTE The NCC port number is permanently set to 3082 3 Click OK save your current settings establish the connection and dismiss the window or click Cancel to dismiss the window the window without saving the settings or establishing the connection NOTE If using a terminal server you may need to specify the gateway port number in the AUI window before accessing the local node 4 From the GUI select the Access menu and then choose either New Subnetwork or Open Subnetwork If you select Open Subnetwork choose the appropriate file from which the subnetwork is to be opened If you select New Subnetwork the Login dialog box immediately displays Script NOTE It is important to delete any script file name that appears in the Script field This ensures that CPro 2000 uses any new settings you sp
312. y node for Ring A Note that only valid slot addresses are displayed The Cancel button can be clicked at any time to CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 277 cancel the operation If the slot you have chosen is correct Click OK The following screen appears 4 Select the timeslot that the end to end path will follow around the ring Only valid timeslot numbers are displayed Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path 278 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 5 You are prompted to choose the secondary node in Ring A Double click the desired node The following screen appears 6 Select the low speed slot for the Secondary Node in Ring A Click OK The main end to end path form displays updated with the information you have selected Enter End To End Path CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 The End to End Path Menu e 279 7 You are prompted to select the primary node for Ring B Double click the desired node The following screen appears 8 Select the low speed slot for the primary node in Ring B Click OK The main end to end path form appears Enter End To End Path 9 You are prompted to select the secondary node for Ring B Double click the desired node The following screen appears 280 e The End to End Path Menu CPro 2000 User Manual Release 11 0 Choose the Low Speed Slot

CPro-2000 User Manual - Alcatel

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents